Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 275

VL200 Melters

Customer Product Manual


Part 779639C
Issued 8/05

NORDSON CORPORATION D DAWSONVILLE, GEORGIA D USA


www.nordson.com
Nordson Corporation welcomes requests for information, comments and inquiries about its products.
General information about Nordson can be found on the Internet using the following address:
http://www.nordson.com.
Address all correspondence to:
Nordson Corporation
Attn: Nonwovens Marketing Department
12 Nordson Drive
Dawsonville, GA 30534

Notice

This is a Nordson Corporation publication which is protected by copyright. Original copyright date 2004.
No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of
Nordson Corporation. The information contained in this publication is subject to change without notice.

Trademarks

AccuJet, AeroCharge, Apogee, AquaGuard, Asymtek, Automove, Baitgun, Blue Box, CanWorks, Century, CF, Clean Coat, CleanSleeve, CleanSpray,
ColorMax, Control Coat, Coolwave, Cross-Cut, Cyclo-Kinetic, Dispensejet, DispenseMate, DuraBlue, Durafiber, Dura-Screen, Durasystem, Easy Coat,
Easymove Plus, EcoDry, Econo-Coat, e.dot, EFD, ETI, Excel 2000, Fillmaster, FlexiCoat, Flexi-Spray, Flex-O-Coat, Flow Sentry, Fluidmove, FoamMelt,
FoamMix, Heli-flow, Helix, Horizon, Hot Shot, iControl, Isocoil, Isocore, Iso-Flo, Kinetix, Little Squirt, Magnastatic, March, MEG, Meltex, Microcoat,
Micromark, MicroSet, Millennium, Mini Squirt, Mountaingate, MultiScan, Nordson, OptiMix, Package of Values, Pattern View, PermaFlo, Plasmod,
Porous Coat, PowderGrid, Powderware, Printplus, Prism, ProBlue, Pro-Flo, ProLink, Pro-Meter, Pro-Stream, RBX, Rhino, Saturn, Scoreguard, Seal Sentry,
Select Charge, Select Coat, Select Cure, Slautterback, Smart-Coat, Solder Plus, Spectrum, Speed-Coat, SureBead, Sure Coat, Sure-Max, Tracking Plus,
Trends, Tribomatic, Ultrasaver, UpTime, Veritec, VersaBlue, Versa-Coat, Versa-Screen, Versa-Spray, Walcom, Watermark, and When you expect more.
are registered trademarks of Nordson Corporation.

Accubar, Advanced Plasma Systems, AeroDeck, AeroWash, AquaCure, ATS, Auto-Flo, AutoScan, Check Mate, Controlled Fiberization, Control Weave,
CPX, DispensLink, Dry Cure, DuraBraid, DuraCoat, DuraDrum, DuraPail, Easy Clean, Eclipse, E-Nordson, Equi=Bead, ESP, e.Stylized, Fill Sentry, HDLV,
iFlow, iON, Iso-Flex, iTrend, iTRAX, Lacquer Cure, Lean Cell, Maverick, Maxima, MicroFin, MicroMax, Minimeter, Multifil, OptiStroke, PatternPro, PCI,
Powder Pilot, Powercure, Primarc, Process Sentry, Prodigy, Pulse Spray, QuadCure, Ready Coat, Royal Blue, Select Series, Sensomatic, Shaftshield,
SheetAire, Smart, Spectral, Spectronic, Speedking, Spray Works, Summit, Sure Brand, Sure Clean, Sure Wrap, Swirl Coat, Tempus, ThruWave,
Trade Plus, Trak, TrueBlue, Ultra, Ultrasmart, Universal, Vantage, Vista, Web Cure, and 2 Rings (Design)
are trademarks of Nordson Corporation.

Designations and trademarks stated in this document may be brands that, when used by third parties for their own purposes,
could lead to violation of the owners’ rights.

Never Seez is a registered trademark of Bostik Inc.


Parker Lubricant is a registered trademark of Parker Seal.
SEW-Eurodrive is a trademark and/or a trade name of SEW-Eurodrive GMBH & C0.
Viton is a registered trademark of DuPont Dow Elastomers. L.L.C.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


All rights reserved
Table of Contents i

Table of Contents
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Safety Alert Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Responsibilities of the Equipment Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Instructions, Requirements, and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
User Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Applicable Industry Safety Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Intended Use of the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Instructions and Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Installation Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Operating Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Maintenance and Repair Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Equipment Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Equipment Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Relieving System Hydraulic Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
De-energizing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Disabling the Guns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
General Safety Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Other Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
First Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Safety Labels and Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Melter Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Hot Melt System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
VL200 Melter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Tank or Hopper/Reservoir Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Pump Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Pumps and Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Vista Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Motor Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Gear-to-Line Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Applicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


ii Table of Contents

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Installing the Applicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Installing the Melter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Installing the Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Installing a Line-Speed Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Connecting Applicator Cordsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Connecting Hose Cordsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Connecting Input/Output Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Changing the Melter Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Connecting Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Overview of the Vista Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
System Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
FAULT Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
READY Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Displays Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Selector Display and Up Arrow Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Multipurpose Display and Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Actual Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
System Setup Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Up and Down Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Right Arrow Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
System Controls Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Vista Control System Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Programming System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Programming Temperature Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Program the Same Temperature Setpoints for All Zones . . . . . 4-20
Program Operating and Standby Temperature Setpoints
Individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Programming Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Set the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Set Heaters On/Off and Enter/Exit Standby Times . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Delete a Heaters On/Off or Enter/Exit Standby Time . . . . . . . . 4-29
Example of Using the Automatic (Clock) Functions . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Motor Control System Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Overview of the Motor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Setting the Pump Speed for Manual-Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Setting Up the Gear-to-Line for Nonstandard Signal Inputs . . . . . 4-33
0 to <10 VDC Line-Speed Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
2 to 10 VDC Line-Speed Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Changing a Motor Control System Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Table of Contents iii

Setup (contd.)
System Flushing and Circulation Control Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . 4-36
Flushing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Adjusting a Circulation Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Record of Vista Control System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Record of System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Record of Operating Temperature Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Record of Standby Temperature Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Record of Heaters On/Off Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Record of Enter/Exit Standby Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Turning the Clock on and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Starting the Melter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Adding Adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Changing Adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Using the Standby Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Shutting Down the Melter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Monitoring Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Monitoring the Vista Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Monitoring or Scanning Zone Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Checking Your Programmed Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Checking the Warning or Fault Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Running a System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Record of Warnings and Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Record of Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Record of Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Tools and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Recommended Maintenance Activities and Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Heater Run-Time Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Relieving System Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Cleaning Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Cleaning or Replacing a Manifold Filter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Remove the Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Clean or Replace the Filter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Install the Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Tightening the Pump Gland Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Tightening the Pump Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Replacing the Motor Transmission Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Cleaning the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Drain the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Clean the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Flush the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


iv Table of Contents

Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Electrical System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Vista Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Motor Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Troubleshooting Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Electrical Safety During Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Melter Not Powering On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Vista Control System Settings Changed or Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Zone Not Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Vista Control System Indicating a Warning or Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Motor Control System Indicating a Fault or Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Checking the Vista POWER Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Checking the Voltage Plug on the Vista Power Board . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Troubleshooting Undertemperature Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Troubleshooting Overtemperature Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Checking a Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Checking a Heater or Heater Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Checking an RTD or RTD Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Repair Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Replacing the Vista Control Assembly or an Assembly Board . . . 7-33
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Power Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Power Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Control Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Control Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Display Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Display Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
System Restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Replacing the Vista Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Control Panel Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Control Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Replacing a Motor Control System Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Replacing an RTD or Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Remove the RTD or Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
RTD or Thermostat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Hydraulic System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Troubleshooting Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Adhesive Leaking Between a Hopper and Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Adhesive Not Applying Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Pump Not Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Manifold Blockage Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Repair Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Preparing for Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Replacing a Manifold Fitting O-Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Replacing a Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Replacing the Hopper O-Ring (VL215 Melters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Replacing the Manifold O-Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Replacing a Pressure Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Cleaning or Replacing a Circulation Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Table of Contents v

Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Drive System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Troubleshooting Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Drive System Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Hose Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Troubleshooting Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Hose Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Removing a Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Installing a Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Using the Illustrated Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Unit Assembly Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
VL210 Unit Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
VL215 Unit Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Hydraulic Assembly Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
VL210 Tank Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
VL215 Hopper and Reservoir Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
One Single-Stream Pump Manifold Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Two Single-Stream Pump Manifold Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
One Dual-Stream Pump Manifold Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Manifold Filter Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Circulation Control Valve Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Pump Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Single-Stream Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Dual-Stream Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Drive System Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Brook Hansen Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
SEW Eurodrive Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Electrical System Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Electrical System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Vista Control Assembly Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
VL210 Motor Control Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
VL215 Motor Control Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
Voltage Conversion Kit Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
Hoses and Hose Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Hose Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Non-Swivel Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Swivel Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Adapter Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Splitter and Extension Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
Splitter Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
Extension Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Line-Speed Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Vista Test Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Hydraulic Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
Recommended Spare Parts and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


vi Table of Contents

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1


Melter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Hose Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Electrical Schematics and Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Hose and Applicator Cordset Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Splitter Cable Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Extension Cable Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
VL210 Melter Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
VL215 Melter Electrical Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Safety 1-1

Section 1
Safety
Read this section before using the equipment. This section contains
recommendations and practices applicable to the safe installation,
operation, and maintenance (hereafter referred to as “use”) of the product
described in this document (hereafter referred to as “equipment”). Additional
safety information, in the form of task-specific safety alert messages,
appears as appropriate throughout this document.

WARNING: Failure to follow the safety messages, recommendations, and


hazard avoidance procedures provided in this document can result in
personal injury, including death, or damage to equipment or property.

Safety Alert Symbols


The following safety alert symbol and signal words are used throughout this
document to alert the reader to personal safety hazards or to identify
conditions that may result in damage to equipment or property. Comply with
all safety information that follows the signal word.

WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,


can result in serious personal injury, including death.

CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,


can result in minor or moderate personal injury.

CAUTION: (Used without the safety alert symbol) Indicates a potentially


hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result in damage to equipment
or property.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Issued 4-02 A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10


1-2 Safety

Responsibilities of the Equipment Owner


Equipment owners are responsible for managing safety information,
ensuring that all instructions and regulatory requirements for use of the
equipment are met, and for qualifying all potential users.

Safety Information
S Research and evaluate safety information from all applicable sources,
including the owner-specific safety policy, best industry practices,
governing regulations, material manufacturer’s product information, and
this document.
S Make safety information available to equipment users in accordance
with governing regulations. Contact the authority having jurisdiction for
information.
S Maintain safety information, including the safety labels affixed to the
equipment, in readable condition.

Instructions, Requirements, and Standards


S Ensure that the equipment is used in accordance with the information
provided in this document, governing codes and regulations, and best
industry practices.
S If applicable, receive approval from your facility’s engineering or safety
department, or other similar function within your organization, before
installing or operating the equipment for the first time.
S Provide appropriate emergency and first aid equipment.
S Conduct safety inspections to ensure required practices are being
followed.
S Re-evaluate safety practices and procedures whenever changes are
made to the process or equipment.

A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10 Issued 4-02 E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Safety 1-3

User Qualifications
Equipment owners are responsible for ensuring that users:

S receive safety training appropriate to their job function as directed by


governing regulations and best industry practices
S are familiar with the equipment owner’s safety and accident
prevention policies and procedures
S receive, equipment- and task-specific training from another qualified
individual
NOTE: Nordson can provide equipment-specific installation,
operation, and maintenance training. Contact your Nordson
representative for information

S possess industry- and trade-specific skills and a level of experience


appropriate to their job function
S are physically capable of performing their job function and are not
under the influence of any substance that degrades their mental
capacity or physical capabilities

Applicable Industry Safety Practices


The following safety practices apply to the use of the equipment in the
manner described in this document. The information provided here is not
meant to include all possible safety practices, but represents the best safety
practices for equipment of similar hazard potential used in similar industries.

Intended Use of the Equipment


S Use the equipment only for the purposes described and within the limits
specified in this document.
S Do not modify the equipment.
S Do not use incompatible materials or unapproved auxiliary devices.
Contact your Nordson representative if you have any questions on
material compatibility or the use of non-standard auxiliary devices.

Instructions and Safety Messages


S Read and follow the instructions provided in this document and other
referenced documents.
S Familiarize yourself with the location and meaning of the safety warning
labels and tags affixed to the equipment. Refer to Safety Labels and
Tags at the end of this section.
S If you are unsure of how to use the equipment, contact your Nordson
representative for assistance.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Issued 4-02 A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10


1-4 Safety

Installation Practices
S Install the equipment in accordance with the instructions provided in this
document and in the documentation provided with auxiliary devices.
S Ensure that the equipment is rated for the environment in which it will be
used and that the processing characteristics of the material will not
create a hazardous environment. Refer to the Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) for the material.
S If the required installation configuration does not match the installation
instructions, contact your Nordson representative for assistance.
S Position the equipment for safe operation. Observe the requirements for
clearance between the equipment and other objects.
S Install lockable power disconnects to isolate the equipment and all
independently powered auxiliary devices from their power sources.
S Properly ground all equipment. Contact your local building code
enforcement agency for specific requirements.
S Ensure that fuses of the correct type and rating are installed in fused
equipment.
S Contact the authority having jurisdiction to determine the requirement for
installation permits or inspections.

Operating Practices
S Familiarize yourself with the location and operation of all safety devices
and indicators.
S Confirm that the equipment, including all safety devices (guards,
interlocks, etc.), is in good working order and that the required
environmental conditions exist.
S Use the personal protective equipment (PPE) specified for each task.
Refer to Equipment Safety Information or the material manufacturer’s
instructions and MSDS for PPE requirements.
S Do not use equipment that is malfunctioning or shows signs of a
potential malfunction.

A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10 Issued 4-02 E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Safety 1-5

Maintenance and Repair Practices


S Perform scheduled maintenance activities at the intervals described in
this document.
S Relieve system hydraulic and pneumatic pressure before servicing the
equipment.
S De-energize the equipment and all auxiliary devices before servicing the
equipment.
S Use only new factory-authorized refurbished or replacement parts.
S Read and comply with the manufacturer’s instructions and the MSDS
supplied with equipment cleaning compounds.
NOTE: MSDSs for cleaning compounds that are sold by Nordson are
available at www.nordson.com or by calling your Nordson
representative.

S Confirm the correct operation of all safety devices before placing the
equipment back into operation.
S Dispose of waste cleaning compounds and residual process materials
according to governing regulations. Refer to the applicable MSDS or
contact the authority having jurisdiction for information.
S Keep equipment safety warning labels clean. Replace worn or damaged
labels.

Equipment Safety Information


This equipment safety information is applicable to the following types of
Nordson equipment:

S hot melt and cold adhesive application equipment and all related
accessories
S pattern controllers, timers, detection and verification systems, and all
other optional process control devices

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Issued 4-02 A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10


1-6 Safety

Equipment Shutdown
To safely complete many of the procedures described in this document, the
equipment must first be shut down. The level of shut down required varies
by the type of equipment in use and the procedure being completed.
If required, shut down instructions are specified at the start of the
procedure. The levels of shut down are:

Relieving System Hydraulic Pressure


Completely relieve system hydraulic pressure before breaking any hydraulic
connection or seal. Refer to the melter-specific product manual for
instructions on relieving system hydraulic pressure.

De-energizing the System


Isolate the system (melter, hoses, guns, and optional devices) from all
power sources before accessing any unprotected high-voltage wiring or
connection point.

1. Turn off the equipment and all auxiliary devices connected to the
equipment (system).
2. To prevent the equipment from being accidentally energized, lock and
tag the disconnect switch(es) or circuit breaker(s) that provide input
electrical power to the equipment and optional devices.
NOTE: Government regulations and industry standards dictate specific
requirements for the isolation of hazardous energy sources. Refer to the
appropriate regulation or standard.

Disabling the Guns


All electrical or mechanical devices that provide an activation signal to the
guns, gun solenoid valve(s), or the melter pump must be disabled before
work can be performed on or around a gun that is connected to a
pressurized system.

1. Turn off or disconnect the gun triggering device (pattern controller, timer,
PLC, etc.).
2. Disconnect the input signal wiring to the gun solenoid valve(s).
3. Reduce the air pressure to the gun solenoid valve(s) to zero; then
relieve the residual air pressure between the regulator and the gun.

A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10 Issued 4-02 E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Safety 1-7

General Safety Warnings and Cautions


Table 1-1 contains the general safety warnings and cautions that apply to
Nordson hot melt and cold adhesive equipment. Review the table and
carefully read all of the warnings or cautions that apply to the type of
equipment described in this manual.

Equipment types are designated in Table 1-1 as follows:

HM = Hot melt (melters, hoses, guns, etc.)


PC = Process control
CA = Cold adhesive (dispensing pumps, pressurized container, and
guns)

Table 1-1 General Safety Warnings and Cautions


Equipment
Type Warning or Caution

WARNING: Hazardous vapors! Before processing any polyurethane


reactive (PUR) hot melt or solvent-based material through a
compatible Nordson melter, read and comply with the material’s
MSDS. Ensure that the material’s processing temperature and
HM
flashpoints will not be exceeded and that all requirements for safe
handling, ventilation, first aid, and personal protective equipment are
met. Failure to comply with MSDS requirements can cause personal
injury, including death.

WARNING: Reactive material! Never clean any aluminum component


or flush Nordson equipment with halogenated hydrocarbon fluids.
Nordson melters and guns contain aluminum components that may
HM
react violently with halogenated hydrocarbons. The use of
halogenated hydrocarbon compounds in Nordson equipment can
cause personal injury, including death.

WARNING: System pressurized! Relieve system hydraulic pressure


before breaking any hydraulic connection or seal. Failure to relieve
HM, CA
the system hydraulic pressure can result in the uncontrolled release of
hot melt or cold adhesive, causing personal injury.

WARNING: Molten material! Wear eye or face protection, clothing that


protects exposed skin, and heat-protective gloves when servicing
HM equipment that contains molten hot melt. Even when solidified, hot
melt can still cause burns. Failure to wear appropriate personal
protective equipment can result in personal injury.

Continued...

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Issued 4-02 A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10


1-8 Safety

General Safety Warnings and Cautions (contd)

Table 1-1 General Safety Warnings and Cautions (contd)


Equipment
Type Warning or Caution

WARNING: Equipment starts automatically! Remote triggering


devices are used to control automatic hot melt guns. Before working
on or near an operating gun, disable the gun’s triggering device and
HM, PC
remove the air supply to the gun’s solenoid valve(s). Failure to disable
the gun’s triggering device and remove the supply of air to the
solenoid valve(s) can result in personal injury.

WARNING: Risk of electrocution! Even when switched off and


electrically isolated at the disconnect switch or circuit breaker, the
equipment may still be connected to energized auxiliary devices.
HM, CA, PC De-energize and electrically isolate all auxiliary devices before
servicing the equipment. Failure to properly isolate electrical power to
auxiliary equipment before servicing the equipment can result in
personal injury, including death.

WARNING: Risk of fire or explosion! Nordson adhesive equipment is


not rated for use in explosive environments and should not be used
with solvent-based adhesives that can create an explosive
HM. CA, PC atmosphere when processed. Refer to the MSDS for the adhesive to
determine its processing characteristics and limitations. The use of
incompatible solvent-based adhesives or the improper processing of
solvent-based adhesives can result in personal injury, including death.

WARNING: Allow only personnel with appropriate training and


experience to operate or service the equipment. The use of untrained
HM, CA, PC or inexperienced personnel to operate or service the equipment can
result in injury, including death, to themselves and others and can
damage the equipment.

Continued...

A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10 Issued 4-02 E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Safety 1-9

Table 1-1 General Safety Warnings and Cautions (contd)


Equipment
Type Warning or Caution

CAUTION: Hot surfaces! Avoid contact with the hot metal surfaces of
guns, hoses, and certain components of the melter. If contact can not
HM be avoided, wear heat-protective gloves and clothing when working
around heated equipment. Failure to avoid contact with hot metal
surfaces can result in personal injury.

CAUTION: Some Nordson melters are specifically designed to


process polyurethane reactive (PUR) hot melt. Attempting to process
PUR in equipment not specifically designed for this purpose can
HM
damage the equipment and cause premature reaction of the hot melt.
If you are unsure of the equipment’s ability to process PUR, contact
your Nordson representative for assistance.

CAUTION: Before using any cleaning or flushing compound on or in


the equipment, read and comply with the manufacturer’s instructions
HM, CA and the MSDS supplied with the compound. Some cleaning
compounds can react unpredictably with hot melt or cold adhesive,
resulting in damage to the equipment.

CAUTION: Nordson hot melt equipment is factory tested with


Nordson Type R fluid that contains polyester adipate plasticizer.
HM Certain hot melt materials can react with Type R fluid and form a solid
gum that can clog the equipment. Before using the equipment,
confirm that the hot melt is compatible with Type R fluid.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Issued 4-02 A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10


1-10 Safety

Other Safety Precautions


S Do not use an open flame to heat hot melt system components.
S Check high pressure hoses daily for signs of excessive wear, damage,
or leaks.
S Never point a dispensing handgun at yourself or others.
S Suspend dispensing handguns by their proper suspension point.

First Aid
If molten hot melt comes in contact with your skin:

1. Do NOT attempt to remove the molten hot melt from your skin.
2. Immediately soak the affected area in clean, cold water until the hot melt
a has cooled.
3. Do NOT attempt to remove the solidified hot melt from your skin.
4. In case of severe burns, treat for shock.
5. Seek expert medical attention immediately. Give the MSDS for the hot
melt to the medical personnel providing treatment.

A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10 Issued 4-02 E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Safety 1-11

Safety Labels and Tags


Figure1-1 illustrates the location of the product safety labels and tags affixed
to the equipment. Table 1-2 provides an illustration of the hazard
identification symbols that appear on each safety label and tag, the meaning
of the symbol, or the exact wording of any safety message.

2
1

Figure 1-1 Safety labels and tags

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Issued 4-02 A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10


1-12 Safety

Safety Labels and Tags (contd)

Table 1-2 Safety Labels and Tags


Item Part Description
1. 230133 WARNING: This equipment may be connected to more than one
power supply. Disconnect all power supplies before opening enclosure.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in death.
WARNING: Remove pressure before opening filter or drain valve. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in serious burns.

2. 242867

[Electric shock warning]

3. 178475
[Hot surface warning]

A1EN−01−[XX−SAFE]−10 Issued 4-02 E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Description 2-1

Section 2
Description

Introduction
This section provides an overview of the Nordson VL200 (Value Line)
melter. The VL200 melter is designed to deliver precisely metered amounts
of thermoplastic hot melt adhesive to a product. VL200 melters are
configurable, which means each melter is constructed according to the
specific choices you made when you ordered it. Refer to the next part of this
section, Melter Identification, for an overview of the VL200 melter product
line.

NOTE: Refer to Section 12, Technical Data, for melter specifications and
dimensions.

NOTE: The melter is not intended for use with polyurethane resin (PUR)
adhesives.

VL210 VL215
Figure 2-1 VL200 melters

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


2-2 Description

Melter Identification
This manual applies to all configurations of the VL200 melter. Before
contacting Nordson Corporation for service-related issues, obtain the part
number of your melter from the melter identification plate. Figure 2-2 shows
the location of the identification plate on each melter model.

For your reference as needed, Table 2-1 provides an basic overview of the
melter configurations and their flow rates.

Table 2-1 Overview of VL200 Melter Configurations


Model Tank Size Pump Configuration Flow Rate (g/min)
VL210 10 l 1 DS or 1 SS 17.7 − 141.4
1 DS 26.5 − 212.0
1 SS 35.2 − 282.0
VL215 15 l 1 DS or 1 SS/2 SS 17.7 − 141.4
1 DS 26.5 − 212.0
NOTE: SS stands for single-stream. DS stands for dual-stream.

VL210 VL215
Figure 2-2 VL200 melters

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Description 2-3

Hot Melt System Overview


A hot melt system has three major equipment groups: the melter, the hoses,
and the applicators. This section provides a brief overview of each
equipment group.

VL200 Melter
The VL200 melter:

S melts adhesive and maintains it at the operating or standby


temperatures you program
S controls the operating and standby temperatures of up to 13 heated
zones, including one internal zone (the tank/reservoir) and 12
external zones (such as hoses, applicators, and/or other heated
zones, such as air heaters)
NOTE: Each heated component (tank/reservoir, hose, applicator,
etc.) is referred to as a heated zone, or zone.
S controls the pump motors
S pumps one or two metered streams of adhesive through hoses to
adhesive-dispensing applicators
The melter has the following components and capabilities, each of which is
described briefly in this section:
S tank or hopper/reservoir assembly
S pump motors (drives)
S pumps and manifold
S Vista control system
S motor control system
S input/output control
S gear-to-line capability
VL210 melters have a tank while VL215 melters have a hopper and
reservoir assembly. Figures 2-3 and 2-4 show the key parts the melter.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


2-4 Description

VL200 Melter (contd)

11

2
10
9 3
8 5 4
7
6

Figure 2-3 Key parts of a VL210 melter


1. Vista control panel 5. Hose cordset connectors 9. Hose port
2. Motor controls 6. Manifold 10. Circulation control valve
3. Main disconnect switch 7. Drain valve 11. Tank lid
4. Pump motor 8. Manifold filter

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Description 2-5

11

2
3
10
9 5 4
8
7
6

Figure 2-4 Key parts of a VL215 melter


1. Vista control panel 5. Hose cordset connectors 9. Hose port
2. Motor controls 6. Manifold 10. Circulation control valve
3. Main disconnect switch 7. Drain valve 11. Hopper lid
4. Pump motor 8. Manifold filter

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


2-6 Description

Tank or Hopper/Reservoir Assembly


The tank or hopper/reservoir assembly holds and heats adhesive. Adhesive
is added to the melter through the tank or hopper lid.

A tank is heated by a cast-in heating element. A hopper/reservoir assembly


is heated by replaceable cartridge-type heaters. Resistance temperature
detectors (RTDs) sense the temperature of the adhesive in the tank or
hopper/reservoir assemblies and relay the temperature to the Vista control
system. An overtemperature thermostat ensures that the temperature of the
adhesive in the tank or hopper/reservoir assembly never exceeds
260 _C (500 _F).

Each VL200 melter model has a different adhesive capacity. Refer to Melter
Identification earlier in this section for an overview of the melter product line.
Refer to Section 8, Hydraulic System, for more information about the tank or
hopper/reservoir assembly.

Pump Motor
An AC gear motor drives each pump on the melter, causing the pump to
draw in adhesive for transfer to the manifold. The motors are controlled
through the motor control system. Refer to Section 9, Drive System, for
more information about the motors.

Pumps and Manifold


The pumps deliver streams of adhesive to the melter manifold. The
adhesive flows through a filter in the manifold and then exits the manifold
into the hoses. Drain valves in the manifold are used to relieve hydraulic
pressure in the system before maintenance or repair activities. The manifold
also includes pressure relief valves, which prevent overpressure conditions,
and circulation control valves, which are used to adjust the recirculation
pressure in the system.

The melter may have one or two pumps, each of which can be either a
single-stream pump or a dual-stream pump with a varying cc/rev/stream
output rate. Manifolds may be either single-stream or dual-stream. Refer to
Melter Identification earlier in this section for an overview of the melter
product line. Refer to Section 8, Hydraulic System, for more information
about the pumps and manifold.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Description 2-7

Vista Control System


The Vista control system provides individual or global temperature control
for up to 14 heated zones. The control system also determines how the
melter operates. For example, you can use the control system to:

S enable the password feature


S set a system-ready time delay, which allows additional time after the
system is ready (heated) for the adhesive to fully melt
S specify an overtemperature setpoint for all the heated zones
S specify the degree to which the temperature of any zone or all zones
may deviate before an out-of-band warning occurs
S place the melter in standby mode either manually or automatically
S control the times at which the melter starts and stops and the times
at which it enters or exits the standby mode
S monitor warning and fault conditions
Procedures for setting up and operating the control system are included in
Section 4, Setup, and Section 5, Operation. Procedures for troubleshooting
and repairing the control system are included in Section 7, Electrical
System.

Motor Control System


The motor control system is used to:
S start and stop the pump motor
S control the motor speed
S place the motor in the manual or gear-to-line mode

Gear-to-Line Capability
The melter is capable of delivering an adhesive output that is geared to the
production line speed. The gear-to-line capability is enabled or disabled
through the motor control system. A line-speed signal generator must be
installed if you want to use the gear-to-line capability.

NOTE: The gear-to-line mode of operation is also known as automatic


mode or key-to-line mode.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


2-8 Description

Hoses
Flexible, electrically heated hoses transfer adhesive from the manifold to the
applicators. The hoses are heated by a spirally wound heating element. An
RTD senses the temperature of the adhesive in the hoses and relays the
temperature to the Vista control system.

Applicators
Applicators apply the adhesive transferred from the melter and then through
the hoses onto the product. Nordson offers a wide variety of applicators that
can produce continuous or intermittent spray, slot, or bead patterns. Refer to
the applicator manuals for more information about the applicators.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Installation 3-1

Section 3
Installation

WARNING: Allow only personnel with appropriate training and experience


to operate or service the equipment. The use of untrained or inexperienced
personnel to operate or service the equipment can result in injury, including
death, to themselves and others, and damage to the equipment.

Introduction
This section provides procedures for installing the melter system
mechanically and electrically. It is organized as follows:
S Inspection
S Mechanical Installation
S Electrical Installation
Procedures for setting up the Vista and motor control systems are in the
next section, Setup. Before you begin, review Section 1, Safety.

Inspection
Exercise normal care to prevent equipment damage during unpacking. After
unpacking the equipment, inspect it for any damage that may have occurred
during shipping. Look for dents and scratches and ensure that all fasteners
are tight. Report any damage to your Nordson representative.

Mechanical Installation
Mechanical installation includes the following activities:
S installing the applicators
S installing the melter
S installing the hoses
S installing a line-speed signal generator (if applicable)

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


3-2 Installation

Installing the Applicators


Install the applicators on the production line by following the instructions in
the applicator manuals. Make sure you will be able to properly route the
hoses from the applicators to the melter. Do not connect the applicator
cordsets or install nozzles at this time.

Installing the Melter


Follow this procedure to install the melter.

1. Remove the bolts that secure the melter to the shipping pallet.

WARNING: Take care when lifting the melter. Using inadequate means to
lift the melter can cause personal injury, equipment damage, or both.

2. Using a suitable lifting device, position the melter on the mounting


surface so that you can open all doors, remove all panels, and access
all parts of the melter for operation, maintenance, and repair. Avoid
installation locations with excessive electrical noise.
NOTE: For the weight and dimensions of the melter, refer to Melter
Specifications and Dimensions in Section 12, Technical Data.

3. If the melter is to be bolted to the mounting surface:


a. Check to see that the melter is level. Install shims as needed.
b. Using the melter’s base as a guide, drill four holes in the mounting
surface for 8-mm (5/16-in.) mounting bolts.
c. See Figure 3-1. Secure the melter to the mounting surface with the
bolts you removed in step 1.

411000003

Figure 3-1 Securing the melter to the mounting surface

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Installation 3-3

Installing the Hoses


Follow this procedure to install the hoses.

NOTE: Throughout the hose installation process, follow the hose routing
and installation guidelines shown in Figure 3-3.
1. Connect a hose to the adhesive port on each applicator in your system.
Use hose fittings and refer to the applicator manual as needed.
NOTE: Refer to Hose Fittings in Section 11, Parts, for hose fitting part
numbers.

2. Route the hoses from the applicators to the melter. Follow the hose
routing guidelines shown in Figure 3-3.
3. See Figure 3-2. Connect the other end of each hose to the appropriate
hose ports on the melter manifold. For each port, remove the O-ring
plug and install an appropriate hose fitting. Apply anti-seize lubricant to
the hose fitting threads.
NOTE: Install each hose so that its cordset is located at the melter end,
where adhesive enters the hose. This ensures that the RTD will
measure the temperature of the adhesive that is exiting the hose at the
applicator end.

411000004

Figure 3-2 Installing a hose fitting in a manifold hose port

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


3-4 Installation

Installing the Hoses (contd)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
P/N 111 940 ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
X
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
X=13 mm (0.50 in.)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
R=203 mm (8.00 in.)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
P/N 271 486 − 8 mm (5/16 in.)
P/N 274 174 − 16 mm (5/8 in.)
P/N 274 174 − 29 mm (1 1/8 in.)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ 450000002

Figure 3-3 Hose installation guidelines

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Installation 3-5

Installing a Line-Speed Signal Generator


If you want to use the gear-to-line capability, install a line-speed signal
generator to measure the speed of the production line. The motor control
system can accept a variety of analog input signals. The default type of
input signal is 0−10 VDC, but the system can also accept a signal that is
less than 10 VDC or a 2−10 VDC signal.

NOTE: Nordson offers a 0−10 VDC line-speed signal generator. Refer to


Optional Accessories in Section 11, Parts, for the generator part number.

NOTE: If the line-speed input signal is anything other than 0−10 VDC, one
or more motor control system parameters must be changed. Section 4,
Setup, provides the procedure for setting up the motor control system for a
nonstandard line-speed input signal.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


3-6 Installation

This page intentionally left blank.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Installation 3-7

Electrical Installation
Electrical installation includes the following activities:
S connecting applicator cordsets
S connecting hose cordsets
S connecting input/output wiring (optional)
S changing the melter voltage (if applicable)
S connecting power
Before proceeding, complete the procedures in Mechanical Installation
earlier in this section.

Connecting Applicator Cordsets


Connect each applicator cordset to the electrical connector on the hose
attached to the applicator. Refer to the applicator manual as needed.

NOTE: If your applicators have heated air zones, you can use a splitter
cable to connect the heated air zones to the hose cordset connectors on the
melter. Refer to Splitter and Extension Cables in Section 11, Parts, for
available cables. Contact your Nordson representative for assistance as
needed.

Connecting Hose Cordsets


Connect each hose cordset to a hose cordset connector on the melter. The
connectors are located above the manifold. Each connector powers one
hose zone and one applicator zone. The maximum allowable wattage for a
single component (hose, applicator, heated air manifold, etc.) is 1,000 W.
The maximum allowable wattage for a component combination is 1,200 W.

NOTE: If there are not enough hose cordset connectors on the melter to
connect all of your hoses, you can use splitter cables to connect the
additional hose cordsets. Refer to Splitter and Extension Cables in
Section 11, Parts, for available cables. Contact your Nordson representative
for assistance as needed.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


3-8 Installation

Connecting Input/Output Wiring


To use the gear-to-line capability or any of the remote monitoring and
control capabilities of the melter, connect the appropriate input/output wiring
to the XM terminal block. See Figure 3-4 for the location of the XM terminal
block. Refer to Table 3-1 (system inputs) and Table 3-2 (system outputs) for
the input/output connections. You can connect input/output wiring to:

S use a remote device to start and stop the pump motor


S provide a line-speed input signal for the gear-to-line capability
S signal devices that alert remotely located operators of the system
status (warning present/absent, fault present/absent, system
ready/not ready)

Table 3-1 System Inputs (see Figure 3-4)


Type of Status of Contact Terminals
Name of Input Function
Contact When Melter is On (see Note A)
Line-speed input Used to accept the signal from Not applicable Not applicable
signal the line-speed signal generator 1 (signal wire)
(see Note B) so that the melter can be 2 (common
operated in the gear-to-line wire)
mode
Motor 1 start/stop Used to remotely start and stop Normally open Open = motor off
the motor (See Note C) 3, 4
Closed = motor on
NOTE A: Terminals 1 and 2 are polarity-sensitive. All other terminals are not polarity-sensitive.
B: Refer to Installing a Line-Speed Signal Generator earlier in this section. If the line-speed input signal is
anything other than 0−10 VDC, be sure to complete Setting Up the Gear-to-Line for Nonstandard Signal
Inputs in Section 4, Setup.
C: The motor start/stop switch on the melter must be in the OFF (O) position for the remote motor start/stop
input to work.

Table 3-2 System Outputs (see Figure 3-4)


Type of Status of Contact Terminals
Name of Input Function
Contact When Melter is On (see Note A)
System warning Used to indicate whether a Normally open Open = warning 7, 8
warning is present or absent present
Closed = no warning
present
System fault Used to indicate whether a fault Normally open Open = fault present 9, 10
is present or absent Closed = no fault
present
System ready Used to indicate whether the Normally open Open = system not 11, 12
system is ready or not ready ready
Closed = system ready
NOTE A: Terminals are not polarity-sensitive.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Installation 3-9

−8A31
SIEMENS

I Jog

0 Menu P

14
13
12
System Ready

11
10
System Fault

9
8
System Warning

−XM

7
6
5
4
Motor 1 Start/Stop

3
2
Line Speed Signal
Input (1=signal,

1
2=common)
9 10 11 12 13 14
8
−XM

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1 2
411000005

Figure 3-4 Input/output wiring connections (back and base inside panels of electrical enclosure shown)
1. XM terminal block 2. Knockout hole and strain relief for
customer-supplied input/output
wiring

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


3-10 Installation

Changing the Melter Voltage


VL200 melters are shipped as 400 VAC units. If applicable, follow this
procedure to change the melter voltage from 400 VAC service to 240 VAC
service. You will need the voltage conversion kit that was shipped with the
melter.

WARNING: Risk of personal injury or death. Ensure that no power is being


supplied to the melter.

1. Ensure that no power source has been connected to the melter.


2. Remove the melter left-side and right-side panels.
3. See Figure 3-5. Install the L2−N jumper (2) across terminals -XL6 and
-XL8 on the main terminal block (1).

1
−1K81

4 1
5

13
9
12
8

14
N

1 2 3

−XL8
L3
1 2 3

−XL7
2
L2
1 2 3

−XL6
L
1 2 3

−XL5
4
P
3
−8Q32

16A
−8Q31

16A
5

411000006

Figure 3-5 Location of the L2−N jumper on the main terminal block
1. L2−N jumper 4. Microboard power supply
2. Motor drive power 5. Cooling fan power
3. System power switch

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Installation 3-11

4. See Figure 3-6. Remove the 400 VAC voltage plug (part 227569) from
the X3 connector on the Vista power board and install the 240 VAC
voltage plug (part 227568) from the voltage conversion kit.

X3
610400021

Figure 3-6 Location of the voltage plug on the Vista power board

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


3-12 Installation

Connecting Power
Follow this procedure to connect power to the melter.

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury, or death. If you are


connecting 240 VAC service, complete the previous procedure, Changing
the Melter Voltage, before proceeding with this procedure.

WARNING: Risk of personal injury or death. Disconnect and lock out


incoming power to the power supply before connecting the electrical service
to the melter.

1. Disconnect and lock out incoming power to the power supply.


2. Ensure that the main disconnect switch on the melter is in the OFF
position.
3. Remove the melter left-side and right-side panels and disconnect the
fan wiring harness on the left-side panel.
4. Route electrical service wiring to the melter for 400 VAC, 3∅, 50/60 Hz
service or 200−240 VAC, 3∅, 50/60 Hz service.
NOTE: Nordson Corporation recommends using 25 mm2 (4 AWG) wire
with at least a 95 _C (203 _F) rating or 16 mm2 (6 AWG) wire with at
least a 105 _C (221 _F) rating.

NOTE: The maximum current draw is 30 A for 400 VAC melters and
60 A for 200−240 VAC melters.

See Figure 3-7.

5. Install a customer-supplied strain relief (PG 29 or 11/2 in. trade size) in


the knockout hole (5) located next to the ground connection and route
the electrical service wiring (2) to the main disconnect switch
terminals (1).
6. Connect:
S the electrical service to 1, 3, and 5 on the main disconnect switch
S (400 VAC melters only) a neutral to the neutral (N) connection (5)
S the ground wire to the PE terminal (3)
NOTE: If the facility’s electrical system is not grounded, ensure that the
ground wire is attached to a reliable earth ground.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Installation 3-13

−1A31

−8A31
SIEMENS

J2

X1
I Jog

0 Menu P

X3

X2

TB1

J4
XS2 XS1

−1K81

4 1
5
TB2

13
9
J2
J9

12
8

14
1 2 3

−XL8
XP2

2 3

−XL7
1
1 2 3

−XL6
1 2 3

−XL5
−1Q21
−8S51

1 3 5

−8Q32
16A

−8Q31
16A
−8R31

2 4 6
−8S21

1
3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
−XM

2
−1K81

4 1
5

5
14 13
12 9
8

N
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

−XL8
3
1

L3
−XL7

L2
−XL6

L
−XL5
4
2

P
−8Q32

16A
−8Q31

16A

6
411000007

Figure 3-7 Power connections (left, back, base, and right inside panels of electrical enclosure shown)
1. Main disconnect switch 3. Main terminal block 5. Neutral connection (400 VAC
2. Knockout hole and strain relief for 4. Customer-supplied electrical melters only)
electrical service wiring service wiring 6. PE terminal

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


3-14 Installation

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-1

Section 4
Setup

WARNING: Allow only personnel with appropriate training and experience


to operate or service the equipment. The use of untrained or inexperienced
personnel to operate or service the equipment can result in injury, including
death, to themselves and others, and damage to the equipment.

Introduction
This section provides procedures for setting up the Vista and motor control
systems, flushing the system, and adjusting the circulation control valves.
Procedures for operating the melter via the Vista and motor controls are in
the next section, Operation. This section is organized as follows:
S Overview of the Vista Control System
S Vista Control System Setup Procedures
S Motor Control System Setup Procedures
S System Flushing and Circulation Control Valve Adjustment
S Record of Vista Control System Settings
To gain a general understanding of how the Vista control system works,
read Overview of the Vista Control System. To set up and program the Vista
control system, use the procedures in Vista Control System Setup
Procedures. Figure 4-1 shows the location of the Vista control panel and the
motor controls.

411000008

Figure 4-1 VL200 controls


1. Vista control panel 2. Motor controls

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-2 Setup

Overview of the Vista Control System


This overview describes each area of the Vista control panel and all of the
lights and keys on the panel. For task-oriented setup procedures, refer to
the next section, Vista Control System Setup Procedures.

The primary function of the Vista control system is to provide individual or


global temperature control for up to 14 heated zones. The control system
also allows you to control some of the melter’s functions.

See Figure 4-2. The Vista control panel has the following functional areas:
S System status area (1)
S Displays area (2)
S System setup area (3)
S System controls area (4)
NOTE: Each heated component (the tank or grid and reservoir, each hose,
each applicator, or any other heated component) is referred to as a heated
zone, or zone.

610400001

Figure 4-2 Functional areas of the Vista control panel


1. System status area 3. System setup area
2. Displays area 4. System controls area

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-3

System Status Area


See Figure 4-3. The FAULT (1) and READY (2) lights in the system status
area of the control panel give you an overview of the status of your system.

1 2

610400003

Figure 4-3 System status area of the Vista control panel


1. FAULT light 2. READY light

FAULT Light
The red FAULT light turns on when:
S a zone is overtemperature
S an RTD in any zone is open or shorted
S a fault-code fault (F1−F9) occurs
When a fault occurs, the heaters automatically turn off.

READY Light
The green READY light turns on when all of these conditions exist:
S All zones are within ±3 °C (±5 °F) of their temperature setpoints.
S The system-ready time delay (if used) has elapsed.
S No faults exist.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-4 Setup

Displays Area
See Figure 4-4. The displays area of the control panel gives you detailed
information about the system. When the system is operating normally, this
area shows the status of each zone. When you are programming the
system, this area shows the system setup.

1 2 3

6 5 4 610400005

Figure 4-4 Displays Area of the Vista control panel


1. Selector display 4. Enter key
2. Multipurpose display 5. Up and down arrow keys
3. Actual-temperature display 6. Up arrow key

Selector Display and Up Arrow Key


The selector display shows

S a zone number when the control system is scanning the heated


zones and when you are programming TEMPERATURE settings
S a day code when you are programming CLOCK settings
S a feature number when you are programming SYSTEM SETTINGS
The up arrow key under the selector display is used to change the setting
shown in the selector display.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-5

Multipurpose Display and Keys


During normal operation, the multipurpose display shows the operating
temperature setpoint for the zone indicated in the selector display. This
allows you to compare the actual temperature of the zone with its setpoint
temperature. When the scan mode is enabled, zone temperatures are
displayed in sequence. When the scan mode is disabled, only the
temperature for a selected zone is displayed. The scan mode is explained
later in System Controls Area.

In the programming mode, the multipurpose display shows a setting for the
zone number, day code, or feature number that is indicated in the selector
display. The up and down arrow keys under the multipurpose display are
used to change the setting shown in the multipurpose display.

Actual Temperature Display


The actual-temperature display shows the actual temperature of the zone
indicated in the selector display. When the scan mode is enabled, zone
temperatures are displayed in sequence. When the scan mode is disabled,
only the temperature for a selected zone is displayed. The scan mode is
explained later in System Controls Area.

Enter Key
The enter key saves the setting shown in the selector display or the
multipurpose display.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-6 Setup

System Setup Area


From the system setup area of the control panel, you can program

S the operating and standby temperatures at which each zone


operates (temperature settings)
S how the system operates (system settings). There are many system
settings you can program, including password enable, system-ready
time delay, overtemperature setpoint, and global and individual
temperature bands. Table 4-2 provides a detailed description of all
the system settings features.
S when the system operates (clock settings). For example, you can
program the system to turn the heaters on or off or to place the
system in standby or operating mode at specific times.
To program these settings, you will use the arrow keys in this area in
conjunction with the arrow keys in the displays area.

1
5
2

610400006

Figure 4-5 System setup area of the Vista control panel


1. Up and down arrow keys 4. SYSTEMS SETTINGS light
2. Right arrow key 5. CLOCK area
3. TEMPERATURE area

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-7

Up and Down Arrow Keys


See Figure 4-5. The up and down arrow keys (1) are used to select the
following features when you are programming from the system setup area:
S SETPOINT (operating temperature setpoints)
S STANDBY (standby temperature setpoints)
S SYSTEM SETTINGS
S SET TIME
S ENTER STANDBY
S EXIT STANDBY
S HEATERS ON
S HEATERS OFF

Right Arrow Key


See Figure 4-5. The right arrow key (2) is used to select the following
features when you are programming from the system setup area:
S INTERNAL zone
S HOSE zone
S GUN (applicator) zone
S INTERVAL 1
S INTERVAL 2

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-8 Setup

System Controls Area


See Figure 4-6. From the system controls area of the control panel you can
control basic system operations and override programmed settings. The
lights in this area tell you whether a feature is on or off.

S The MONITOR/SCAN key (1) is used to toggle between the monitor


and scan modes. The monitor mode allows you to check the
temperature of a particular zone and the scan mode allows you to
check the zone temperatures in sequence.
S The STANDBY key (2) is used to turn the standby feature on or off.
S The HEATERS key (3) is used to turn the heaters on or off.
S The CLOCK key (4) is used to turn the clock on or off. The clock
must be on for the melter’s automatic functions to work.
S The PUMP key (5) is used only to enable the pump motors. The
pump motors are controlled through the motor control system.
S The CLEAR FAULTS key (6) is used to clear faults and to run a
system test to determine whether a fault was corrected.
S The POWER switch (7) is used to turn the power to the Vista control
system on or off. This switch does not turn power to the melter on or
off. Power to the melter is controlled by the main disconnect switch
on the back of the melter.

6 7

610400004

Figure 4-6 System controls area of the Vista control panel


1. MONITOR/SCAN key and light 5. PUMP key and light (not
2. STANDBY key and light used)
3. HEATERS key and light 6. CLEAR FAULTS key and light
4. CLOCK key and light 7. POWER switch

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-9

This page intentionally left blank.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-10 Setup

Vista Control System Setup Procedures


This part of the Setup section provides task-oriented procedures for setting
up the Vista control system for your operation. Before performing any of
these procedures, you may find it helpful to read the previous section,
Overview of the Vista Control System.

See Figure 4-7. All setup procedures are performed from the system setup
area of the control panel. From the system setup area, you can access the
features shown in Table 4-1.

NOTE: Each heated component (the tank or grid and reservoir, each hose,
and each applicator) is referred to as a heated zone, or zone.

Table 4-1 Features You Can Access from the System Setup Area of the Vista Control Panel
Type of Settings Features
System settings S Password enable
S System-ready time delay
S Overtemperature setpoint
S Celsius or Fahrenheit display
S Global temperature band
S Individual temperature bands
S Sequential or simultaneous startup
S Display heater proportioning
S Warning or power on/off status
S System ready status
S Auto-energize heaters
S Heater run time
Temperature settings S Setpoint temperature: the temperature that a zone will maintain during normal
operation
S Standby temperature: the temperature to which a zone will be reduced when
the system is in the standby mode
Clock settings S Set time: used to set the current day and time
S Enter and exit standby: the times that you want the system to automatically
enter and exit the standby mode
S Heaters on and off: the times that you want heaters to automatically turn on
and off

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-11

610400002

Figure 4-7 System setup area of the Vista control panel


1. TEMPERATURE area 3. CLOCK area
2. SYSTEM SETTINGS light

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-12 Setup

Programming System Settings


The values entered for the system settings determine how the melter
operates.

1. Place the Vista POWER switch in the ON position. When you turn the
control system on:
S The system scans each heated zone, displaying the zone
temperatures in sequence.
S The multipurpose display shows four dashes (– – – –) for each zone
until an operating temperature setpoint is entered. After a setpoint is
entered, the display will show the programmed setpoint.
S The actual-temperature display shows the room temperature
because no heat has been applied to the zones.
See Figure 4-8.

2. Press the up or down arrow keys (1, 2) next to the SYSTEM SETTINGS
light until the SYSTEM SETTINGS light turns on. When you are in the
system settings mode:
S The selector display shows a feature number.
S The multipurpose display shows the current setting for the feature
number shown in the selector display.
NOTE: If you have enabled the password feature, you must change the
number in the multipurpose display (500) to the password (321) and
press the enter key before the system will allow you to change any
system settings features.

610400007

Figure 4-8 Entering the system settings mode


1. Up arrow key 3. Right arrow key
2. Down arrow key

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-13

3. Refer to Table 4-2 to determine which system settings features you want
to change.

WARNING: Risk of fire. The default overtemperature setpoint is 218 _C


(425 _F). If the material safety data sheet (MSDS) for your adhesive shows
that the flash point of the adhesive is below 218 _C (425 _F), you must set
the overtemperature setpoint to at least 42 _C (75 _F) below the flash point
of the adhesive.

See Figure 4-9.

4. Perform these steps for each system settings feature you wish to
change:
a. Press the up arrow key (1) under the selector display (2) until the
number of the feature you wish to change appears in the selector
display. As the feature number changes, the multipurpose display (3)
changes to show the current setting for the feature.
NOTE: See Figure 4-8. To move through the feature numbers in
increments of 10, press the right arrow key (3).
b. Press the up or down arrow keys (4) under the multipurpose display
to change the setting. The multipurpose display flashes.
c. Press the enter key (5) to save the new setting. The multipurpose
display stops flashing.
5. Record your settings on the forms provided in Record of Vista Control
System Settings at the end of this section.
6. Press the MONITOR/SCAN key to exit the system settings mode.

2 3

4 5
610400008

Figure 4-9 Displays area of the Vista control panel in the system settings mode
1. Up arrow key 4. Up and down arrow keys
2. Selector display 5. Enter key
3. Multipurpose display

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-14 Setup

Programming System Settings (contd)

Table 4-2 Description of the Systems Settings Features


Feature Default Optional
Feature Description
No. Setting Settings
0 Password Establishes the password as 321. The 321 none
password cannot be changed.
1 Password enable Used to enable or disable the password 0 0 (off)
requirement. When this feature is on, operators (off) 1 (on)
can view programmed settings but cannot
change them. To change the settings, operators
must enter the correct password (321). When
this feature is off, operators can change all
settings without entering a password.
2 System-ready Used to specify an amount of additional time for 18 (minutes) 0−60 (minutes)
time delay the adhesive in the system to melt after all
zones have reached their setpoint
temperatures. At the end of the time delay, the
READY light turns on.
3 Overtemperature Used to specify the maximum temperature any 218/425 52−246/125−475
setpoint zone can reach before the system initiates a (_C/_F) (_C/_F)
fault condition. This setting should be at least
14 _C (25 _F) above the highest operating
temperature setpoint. The system will not allow
you to set the overtemperature setpoint lower
than this, or the operating temperature setpoint
higher. (See Note A.)
4 Celsius/ Used to specify whether the displays will show F (Fahrenheit) F (Fahrenheit)
Fahrenheit temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit units. C (Celsius)
display
5 Global Used to specify the degree to which the 17/30 6−28/10−50
temperature band temperature of any zone may deviate before (_C/_F) (_C/_F)
the system indicates an out-of-band warning.
(See Note B.)
6−19 Individual Used to specify the degree to which the 17/30 6−28/10−50
temperature temperature of an individual zone may deviate (_C/_F) (_C/_F)
bands before the system indicates a warning. (See
(See Note D.) Note C.)
20 Sequential or Used to specify whether the system will perform 1 0 (simultaneous)
simultaneous a sequential startup (internal and hose zones (sequential) 1 (sequential)
startup heat first, then applicator zones) or
simultaneous startup (all zones heat at once).
21 Display heater Used to display the heater proportioning (a 0 0 (no display)
proportioning flashing INTERNAL, HOSE, or GUN light). (no display) 1 (show display)
NOTE A: The overtemperature setpoint should be at least 42 _C (75 _F) below the flash point temperature of the
adhesive. Refer to the adhesive’s MSDS to determine its flash point temperature.
B: If you enter a setpoint that is higher than the tank or reservoir temperature setpoint, the pump will start
when the tank or reservoir reaches its temperature setpoint.
C: If you enter a new setpoint for this feature, the new setpoint is immediately entered for the individual
zones (Features 6−19). However, it is not saved as the setpoint for Feature 5. Feature 5 always returns
to the default setpoint of 6 _C (10 _F).
D: Feature 6 = tank or reservoir, Feature 7 = grid, Features 8−13 = hoses 1−6, Features 14−19 =
applicators 1−6.
Continued...

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-15

Table 4-2 Description of the Systems Settings Features (contd)


Feature Default Optional
Feature Description
No. Setting Settings
22 System Used to toggle the warning output contact to alert 1 0 (power on/off)
warning or remotely located operators that a system warning (system 1 (system
power-on/off has occurred or that the power is on. warning) warning)
status
23 System ready Used to toggle the system-ready output contact to 1 0 (pump on)
or pump on/off alert remotely located operators that the system is (system ready) 1 (system ready)
status ready or that the pump is on.
24 Not used
25 Auto-energize Used to turn the auto-energize heaters feature on 1 0 (off)
heaters or off. If the feature is on, the system turns all (on) 1 (on)
heaters on automatically when the melter is turned
on. However, if you have programmed the system
to turn all heaters on and off automatically, using
the clock function, your clock settings override the
auto-energize heaters feature. If the auto-energize
heaters feature is off, you must turn the heaters on
manually, or allow any clock settings you have
programmed to turn the heaters on or off.
26 Heater run Used to display the total time (in hours) that the See Note A none
time heaters have been running. This feature assists
with servicing and maintenance. Refer to Heater
Run-Time Check in Section 6, Maintenance.
27 Fault log (most Used to display the cause of the most recent fault. See Note A none
recent fault) Refer to Checking the Warning or Fault Log in
Section 5, Operation.
28 Fault log Used to display the cause of the second most See Note A none
(second most recent fault. Refer to Checking the Warning or
recent fault) Fault Log in Section 5, Operation.
29 Fault log (third Used to display the cause of the third most recent See Note A none
most recent fault. Refer to Checking the Warning or Fault Log
fault) in Section 5, Operation.
30−34 Not used
35 Warning log Used to display the cause of the most recent See Note A none
(most recent warning. Refer to Checking the Warning or Fault
warning) Log in Section 5, Operation.
36 Warning log Used to display the cause of the second most See Note A none
(second most recent warning. Refer to Checking the Warning or
recent Fault Log in Section 5, Operation.
warning)
37 Warning log Used to display the cause of the third most recent See Note A none
(third most warning. Refer to Checking the Warning or Fault
recent Log in Section 5, Operation.
warning)
NOTE A: Features 26−29 and 35−37 are always on. There is no default setting.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-16 Setup

Programming Temperature Settings


From the system setup area of the control panel you can specify an
operating temperature setpoint (SETPOINT) and a standby temperature
setpoint (STANDBY) for each heated zone: the tank or the grid and the
reservoir, each hose, and each applicator. The tank or grid and reservoir
zones are internal zones. The hose and applicator zones are external
zones.

NOTE: If you used some of the melter’s cordset receptacles for heated-air
zones, you will be able to program temperature setpoints for those zones as
well.

Table 4-3 Types of Temperature Setpoints


Type Description
Operating temperature The temperature at which the adhesive in the
setpoint zone is maintained during normal operation.
Standby temperature The temperature to which the adhesive in the
setpoint zone will be reduced when the system is in the
standby mode.

If you do not enter a standby temperature setpoint for a zone, the default
setting of OFF will remain in effect for that zone. If you press the STANDBY
key to place the system in the standby mode, the zones will cool to room
temperature (while the HEATERS light remains on). If you make the standby
temperature setpoints equal to the operating temperature setpoints,
pressing the STANDBY key will have no effect on the zone temperature
setpoints, but it will turn the READY light off and disable the pump.

NOTE: The default operating temperature setpoint for all zones is OFF
(less than 38 _C or 100 _F). To turn a zone on, set the operating
temperature setpoint to 38 _C (100 _F) or higher.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-17

Each heated zone is identified by a zone number and the INTERNAL,


HOSE, or GUN lights, as shown in Table 4-4. When you are in the
temperature programming mode, the zone number is shown in the selector
display and the appropriate zone light (INTERNAL, HOSE, or GUN) turns
on.

Table 4-4 Identifying the Zone Number


Zone Number Zone selected when the...
Shown iin S
Sh Selector
l INTERNAL HOSE GUN
Display light is on light is on light is on
(See Note A) (See Note B) (See Note B)
0 Set All Set All Set All
(See Note C) (See Note C) (See Note C)
1 Tank or reservoir Hose 1 Applicator 1
2 Grid Hose 2 Applicator 2
(if applicable)
3 Hose 3 Applicator 3
4 Hose 4 Applicator 4
NOTE A: For example, if the selector display shows a number 3 and the GUN
(applicator) light is on, then the selected zone is applicator 3.
B: If you connected heated-air zones to the melter, these zone numbers
would represent the heated-air zones rather than a hose or applicator
zone.
C: Use Set All to set all zones to the same temperature. Only zones that
are turned on are affected.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-18 Setup

Programming Temperature Settings (contd)


Follow these guidelines when entering temperature setpoints:

S Check the adhesive manufacturer’s material safety data sheet


(MSDS) for the recommended application temperature of your
adhesive.
S For a zone to be on, the operating temperature setpoint must be
38 _C (100 _F) or higher.
S Set the standby temperature setpoint 56 _C (100 _F) lower than the
operating temperature setpoint.
S Before entering any temperature setpoints, ensure that the
overtemperature setpoint is at least 14 _C (25 _F) higher than the
highest operating temperature setpoint you plan to use. Refer to
Table 4-2, Feature 3.
TIP: To program temperature setpoints quickly:

To do this... Follow these steps...


Set all zones to the same Complete the Program All Zones to the
temperature setpoint Same Temperature procedure.
Set most zones to the same 1. Complete the Program All Zones to
temperature setpoint the Same Temperature procedure.

2. Complete the Program Operating and


Standby Temperature Setpoints
Individually to change the only
setpoints you wish to change.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-19

This page intentionally left blank.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-20 Setup

Program the Same Temperature Setpoints for All Zones


Follow this procedure to set all zones to the same operating or standby
temperature setpoints. Use this procedure along with Program Operating
and Standby Temperature Setpoints Individually to set most zones to the
same temperature setpoint.

NOTE: This procedure works only for zones that have been turned on. The
default setting for all zones is OFF. To turn a zone on, refer to the next
procedure, Program Operating and Standby Temperature Setpoints
Individually, and set the temperature of each zone you want to turn on to at
least 38 _C (100 _F).
1. If you have not already done so, place the Vista POWER switch in the
ON position.

See Figure 4-10.

2. In the system setup area, press the up (1) or down (2) arrow keys until
the SETPOINT (for operating temperature setpoint) or STANDBY (for
standby temperature setpoint) light turns on. The first internal zone
number is shown in the selector display and the INTERNAL light in the
system setup area turns on.
NOTE: If you have enabled the password feature, you must change the
number in the multipurpose display (500) to the password (321) and
press the enter key before the system will allow you to change any of
the temperature setpoints.

610400009

Figure 4-10 Entering the temperature settings mode


1. Up arrow key 2. Down arrow key

See Figure 4-11.

3. In the displays area, press the up arrow key (1) under the selector
display (2) until a 0 (set all) appears in the display. All three zone-type
lights turn on and the multipurpose display (3) shows a default
temperature setpoint of 177 _C (350 _F).
4. Press the up or down arrow keys (4) under the multipurpose display to
change the temperature setpoint. The multipurpose display flashes.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-21

5. Press the enter key (5) to accept the setting. The multipurpose display
stops flashing. Now the temperature setpoint of all zones that are turned
on is the setpoint shown in the multipurpose display.
6. Record your setting on the forms provided in Record of Vista Control
System Settings at the end of this section.
7. If you wish to change the temperature setpoint of one or more zones
individually, go to the next procedure, Program Operating and Standby
Temperature Setpoints Individually.
8. Press the MONITOR/SCAN key to exit the temperature settings mode.

2 3

4 5 610400019

Figure 4-11 Displays area of the Vista control panel in the set all temperature
settings mode
1. Up arrow key 4. Up and down arrow keys
2. Selector display (0 for set all) 5. Enter key
3. Multipurpose display

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-22 Setup

Program Operating and Standby Temperature Setpoints


Individually
1. If you have not already done so, place the Vista POWER switch in the
ON position.

See Figure 4-12.

2. In the system setup area, press the up and down arrow keys (1, 2) until
either the SETPOINT (for operating temperature setpoints) or STANDBY
(for standby temperature setpoints) light turns on. The first internal zone
number shows in the selector display and the INTERNAL light turns on.
NOTE: If you have enabled the password feature, you must change the
number in the multipurpose display (500) to the password (321) and
press the enter key before the system will allow you to change any of
the temperature setpoints.

610400009

Figure 4-12 Entering the temperature settings mode


1. Up arrow key 2. Down arrow key

3. If you want to program a hose or applicator zone, press the right arrow
key until the HOSE or GUN (applicator) light turns on.

See Figure 4-13.

4. In the displays area, press the up arrow key (1) under the selector
display (2) until the zone number you want appears in the display (refer
to Table 4-4). The multipurpose display (3) changes to show the current
temperature setpoint for the zone.
5. In the displays area, press the up or down arrow key (4) under the
multipurpose display to change the temperature. The multipurpose
display flashes.
NOTE: Pressing the up or down arrow keys once changes the number
in increments of one. Pressing and holding the key changes the number
in increments of five.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-23

6. Press the enter key (5) to save the setting. The multipurpose display
stops flashing.

2 3

4 5
610400008

Figure 4-13 Displays area of the Vista control panel in the system settings mode
1. Up arrow key 4. Up and down arrow keys
2. Selector display 5. Enter key
3. Multipurpose display

7. Record your setting on the forms provided in Record of Vista Control


System Settings at the end of this section.
8. Press the up arrow key under the selector display to select the next
zone number and repeat this procedure until you have entered
temperature setpoints for all zones.
9. Press the MONITOR/SCAN key to exit the temperature settings mode.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-24 Setup

Programming Clock Settings


The seven-day clock turns the heaters on and off or takes the melter into
and out of the standby mode at the times you program. The clock settings
work in conjunction with the control system clock, which keeps the correct
day and time. It does not matter whether you set the current day and time
first, or set the heater on/off and enter/exit standby times first. However,
both features must be set for the heaters to turn on and off correctly or for
the melter to enter and exit the standby mode correctly.

NOTE: If you experience a power outage, the internal clock will continue to
keep time. Once power is restored and the melter is turned on, it will
resume normal operations. You do not need to reprogram any features
controlled by the clock.

NOTE: The clock does not automatically adjust for seasonal time shifts,
such as daylight savings time.

Set the Clock


Follow this procedure to set the clock for the current time and day. The clock
uses a seven-day, 24-hour format.

1. If you have not already done so, place the Vista POWER switch in the
ON position.

See Figure 4-14.

2. In the system setup area, press the up and down arrow keys (1) until the
SET TIME (2) light turns on.
NOTE: If you have enabled the password feature, you must change the
number in the multipurpose display (500) to the password (321) and
press the enter key before the system will allow you to change the clock
settings.

610400010

Figure 4-14 Entering the set time mode


1. Up and down arrow keys 2. SET TIME light

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-25

3. Check the selector display. The selector display flashes a number


representing the day of the week as shown in Table 4-5.

Table 4-5 Day Codes


Day Code Day of Week Represented
1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
7 Sunday

See Figure 4-15.

4. Ensure that the day code (1) is correct.


Correct? Action
Yes Press the enter key (4) to save the setting.
No Press the up arrow key (6) under the selector display
until the correct day code appears in the display; then
press the enter key to save the setting.

5. When you press the enter key, the selector display stops flashing and
the hour portion (2) of the multipurpose display begins flashing. Ensure
that the hour shown in the multipurpose display is correct.
Correct? Action
Yes Press the enter key to save the setting.
No Press the up or down arrow key under the multipurpose
display until the correct hour appears in the display; then
press the enter key to save the setting.

6. When you press the enter key, the hour portion of the multipurpose
display stops flashing and the minutes portion (3) of the display begins
flashing. Ensure that the minutes shown in the multipurpose display are
correct.
NOTE: Once the clock is set, all displays stop flashing.

Correct? Action
Yes Press the enter key to save the setting.
No Press the up or down arrow key below the multipurpose
display until the correct minutes appears in the display;
then press the enter key to save the setting.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-26 Setup

Set the Clock (contd)


7. Press the MONITOR/SCAN key to exit the set time mode.

1 2 3

6 5 4 610400011

Figure 4-15 Displays area of the Vista control panel in the set time mode
1. Selector display (day code) 4. Enter key
2. Multipurpose display (hours) 5. Up and down arrow keys
3. Multipurpose display (minutes) 6. Up arrow key

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-27

Set Heaters On/Off and Enter/Exit Standby Times


The clock turns the heaters on or off or takes the melter into and out of the
standby mode at the times you program. The clock can store two sets of
times, referred to as intervals, for each day of the week. Each interval can
have four time settings:
S one to turn the heaters on
S one to turn the heaters off
S one to enter standby
S one to exit standby
Follow this procedure to set times for the melter to turn the heaters on/off
and to enter/exit the standby mode. After you have programmed your clock
settings, use the CLOCK key to turn the clock on and off, depending on
whether you want the melter to perform the automatic heaters on/off or
enter/exit standby functions. The CLOCK light turns on when the clock is
active.

NOTE: The clock settings must be between 01:00 and 24:00 hours.

NOTE: If you have enabled the password feature, you must change the
number in the multipurpose display (500) to the password (321) and press
the enter key before the system will allow you to change the clock settings.

See Figure 4-16.

1. In the system setup area, press the up and down arrow keys (1) until the
light next to the feature you wish to program (HEATERS ON, HEATERS
OFF, ENTER STANDBY, or EXIT STANDBY) turns on. The selector
display flashes a number (the day code) representing the day of the
week and the INTERVAL 1 light turns on.
2. Press the right arrow key (2) until the light (INTERVAL 1 or INTERVAL 2)
(3) next to the interval you wish to program turns on.

610400012

Figure 4-16 Entering the clock settings mode


1. Up and down arrow keys 3. INTERVAL 1 and 2 lights
2. Right arrow key

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-28 Setup

Set Heaters On/Off and Enter/Exit Standby Times (contd)


See Figure 4-17.

3. Press the up arrow key (6) under the selector display to select the day
code (1) you want to set. Refer to Table 4-6.

Table 4-6 Day Codes


Day Code Day of Week Represented
1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
7 Sunday

1 2 3

6 5 4 610400011

Figure 4-17 Displays area of the Vista control panel in the set time mode
1. Selector display (day code) 4. Enter key
2. Multipurpose display (hours) 5. Up and down arrow keys
3. Multipurpose display (minutes) 6. Up arrow key

4. Press the enter key (4) to save the day code setting. The selector
display stops flashing and the hour (2) portion of the multipurpose
display flashes.
5. Press the up or down arrow keys (5) under the multipurpose display until
the hour you want to set appears in the display.
6. Press the enter key to save the hour setting. The hour shown in the
multipurpose display stops flashing and the minutes portion of the
multipurpose display begins flashing.
7. Press the up or down arrow keys under the multipurpose display until
the minutes (3) you want to set appear in the multipurpose display.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-29

8. Press the enter key to save the minutes setting. All displays stop
flashing and a time for the melter to turn the heaters on/off or to
enter/exit standby has been programmed.
9. Record your setting on the forms provided in Record of Vista Control
System Settings at the end of this section.
10. Repeat steps 1−9 for each heaters on/off and enter/exit standby time
you wish to set.
11. Press the MONITOR/SCAN key to exit the clock settings mode.

Delete a Heaters On/Off or Enter/Exit Standby Time


1. From the system setup area, press the up and down arrow keys until the
light next to the feature you wish to change (HEATERS ON, HEATERS
OFF, ENTER STANDBY, or EXIT STANDBY) turns on. The selector
display flashes a code that represents a day of the week.
NOTE: If you have enabled the password feature, you must change the
number in the multipurpose display (500) to the password (321) and
press the enter key before the system will allow you to change the clock
settings.

2. Press the up arrow key under the selector display until the code for the
day you want to change appears in the selector display. Refer to
Table 4-6 for the meaning of the day codes.
3. Press the enter key to save the setting. The selector display stops
flashing and the hours portion of multipurpose display flashes.
4. Press the up or down arrow keys under the multipurpose display until
four dashes (– – – –) appear on the display. The dashes indicate that no
setting will be entered.
5. Press the enter key to save the setting. All displays stop flashing and the
time has been deleted.
6. Record your setting on the forms provided in Record of Vista Control
System Setting at the end of this section.
NOTE: To delete times for an entire day, complete this procedure for
each interval set for each feature.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-30 Setup

Example of Using the Automatic (Clock) Functions


At a company, the production line runs for two shifts each day and shuts
down on weekends. Both shifts shut down for 45 minutes twice each day:
once at 12:00 noon for lunch and again at 6:00 in the evening for dinner. By
using the automatic functions, the company can have the melter start and
stop by programming the Vista control system to

S enter standby at 12:00 P.M. (INTERVAL 1) and again at 6:00 P.M.


(INTERVAL 2)
S exit standby at 12:30 P.M. (INTERVAL 1) and at 6:30 P.M.
(INTERVAL 2), allowing 15 minutes for the system to reach
application temperature
S turn the heaters on Monday through Friday 30 minutes before the
start of the first shift (INTERVAL 1)
S turn the heaters off Monday through Friday at the end of the second
shift (INTERVAL 1)
NOTE: The clock is not set for Saturday or Sunday when the company is
closed.

Motor Control System Setup Procedures


This part of Section 4 provides an overview of the motor controls as well as
procedures for setting the pump speed for manual-mode operation, setting
up the gear-to-line capability for nonstandard line-speed input signals, and
changing a motor control system parameter. For many installations, none of
these procedures will be needed.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-31

Overview of the Motor Controls


The motor control system controls the pump motor. Table 4-7 describes the
motor controls.

Table 4-7 Motor Controls


Item No. in
Control Function
Figure 4-18
This switch is used to manually start and stop the pump. It
is operable only when the melter has reached the
system-ready condition. If a remote motor start/stop switch
1 Motor start/stop switch
is used, this switch must be in the off (O) position. To
install a remote motor start/stop switch, refer to
Connecting Input/Output Wiring in Section 3, Installation.
This dial is used to control the motor speed in either the
2 Motor speed dial
manual or gear-to-line mode.
This switch is used to place the melter in either the manual
or gear-to-line mode. To set up the melter to operate in the
gear-to-line mode, refer to Installing a Line-Speed Signal
3 Gear-to-line/manual switch
Generator and Connecting Input/Output Wiring in
Section 3, Installation, and (if applicable) to Setting Up the
Gear-to-Line for Nonstandard Signal Inputs in this section.

1 1

2 2

3 3

VL210 VL215
Figure 4-18 Motor controls (refer to Table 4-7)

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-32 Setup

Setting the Pump Speed for Manual-Mode Operation


Use the following formula to determine the best pump speed for an
application in which the manual mode of operation will be used:

desiredflowrate[gńmin]
pumpspeed[rpm] +
adhesivedensity[gńcc] pumpoutputrate[ccńrev]

NOTE: To prevent excessive wear on the pump, avoid prolonged operation


of the pump at speeds greater than 80 rpm.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-33

Setting Up the Gear-to-Line for Nonstandard Signal Inputs


If you want to use the gear-to-line capability of the melter and you installed
a nonstandard line-speed signal generator (anything other than 0−10 VDC),
follow these procedures to determine how the motor control system
parameters should be changed. The system can accept a signal that is 0 to
<10 VDC or a signal that is 2 to <10 VDC.

0 to <10 VDC Line-Speed Signal


1. If the maximum value of your line-speed signal generator is less than 10
VDC, use the following formula to determine the value to set for
parameter P022 (maximum analog frequency):

ǒVmax
10 Ǔ87Hz

where Vmax is the maximum value of the analog voltage generator.


2. Set parameter P022 to the value you calculated in step 1. Refer to
Changing a Motor Control System Parameter later in this section.

2 to 10 VDC Line-Speed Signal


1. If the minimum value of your line-speed signal generator is 2 VDC and
the maximum value is less than 10 VDC, use the following formula to
determine the value to set for parameter P022 (maximum analog
frequency):

ǒVmax
10 * 2 Ǔ87Hz
* 2

where Vmax is the maximum value of the analog voltage generator.


2. Change the motor control system parameters as follows:
S Set parameter P023 to 0.
S Set parameter P022 to the the value you calculated in step 1.
Refer to the next procedure, Changing a Motor Control System
Parameter.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-34 Setup

Changing a Motor Control System Parameter


Follow this procedure to check or change a motor control system parameter.
Figure 4-19 shows the motor drive keypad that is used to change the motor
control system parameters. This keypad is located inside the electrical
enclosure. Table 4-8 provides the factory settings for the motor control
system parameters.

NOTE: The type of motor varies depending on the melter configuration—


refer to the correct column in Table 4-8 for your melter. If you need
assistance determining the configuration of your melter, refer to Melter
Identification in Section 2, Description, to determine the part number of your
1 2 melter and then contact your Nordson representative.
3
NOTE: The motor drive keypad is disabled by default. To control the motor
using the keypad, set parameters P0700 and P1000 to 1.

NOTE: The keypad can be installed on and removed from the motor drive
while the power is on. If parameter P0700 is set to 1, the drive will stop if the
keypad is removed.

NOTE: The Fn key may also be used to acknowledge a fault condition.


1. To access the motor drive keypad, loosen the screws that secure the
Vista control assembly to the melter and then carefully lower the
assembly.
2. Press the Fn key. The right-hand value in the display will blink.
3. Press the up or down arrow keys until the desired value appears in the
display.
4. Press the Fn key again to move to the next value in the display.
5. Repeat steps 2−3 until the display shows the desired values.
4
6. Press P key to save the setting.
Figure 4-19 Keys used to
change a motor
control system
parameter
1. Display
2. Fn (function) key
3. Up and down arrow keys
4. P (parameter) key

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-35

Table 4-8 Motor Control System Parameter Factory Settings


Factory Setting Factory Setting
Parameter Description
(Brook Hansen Motor) (SEW Eurodrive Motor)
P0003 2 2 User access level
P0010 1 1 Start quick commissioning
P0100 0 0 Check/set frequency setting (50/60 Hz)
P0300 1 1 Motor type
P0304 230 220 Motor voltage (VAC)
P0305 3.60 1.98 Motor current (A)
P0307 0.64 0.37 Motor power (kW)
P0308 0.59 0.74 Motor power factor
P0310 87 87 Motor frequency (Hz)
P0311 2480 1380 Motor speed (RPM)
P0335 0 0 Motor cooling method
P0640 150 150 Motor overload factor (%)
P0700 2 2 Start/stop command source
P1000 2 2 Frequency setpoint source
P1080 0 0 Minimum frequency (Hz)
P1082 87 50 Maximum frequency (Hz)
P1120 1 1 Ramp-up time (sec)
P1121 1 1 Ramp-down time (sec)
P1135 5 5 Off 3 ramp-down time (sec)
P1300 0 0 Control mode
P1500 0 0 Torque setpoint
P1910 1 1 Motor data identification
P3900 2 2 End quick commissioning
NOTE: After quick commissioning, set P0010 to 0!
P0776 N/A 1 Type of DAC
P1310 5 5 Continuous boost (%)
P2000 87 50 Reference frequency (Hz)

1 2

Figure 4-20 Brook Hansen motor and SEW Eurodrive motor


1. Brook Hansen motor 2. SEW Eurodrive motor

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-36 Setup

System Flushing and Circulation Control Valve


Adjustment
Use these procedures to flush the entire system and to adjust the circulation
control valves in the manifold. Each adhesive stream has its own drain valve
and circulation control valve. If you are using two adhesive streams, they
may be flushed at the same time. However, the circulation control valves for
each stream should be adjusted individually.

Nordson recommends

S initial flushing (prior to first operation) of the melter, hoses, and


applicators to remove debris and impurities from the system
S weekly flushing of the system to prevent char buildup

Flushing the System


Follow this procedure to flush the system. Refer to Section 5, Operation, for
an illustration that shows the location of the switches, dials, and lights
referred to in this procedure.

1. Remove all nozzles from the applicators.


2. Place the motor start/stop switch in the off (O) position and set the motor
speed dial to 0.
3. Place the main disconnect switch in the ON position.
4. Place the Vista POWER switch in the ON position.
5. Open the tank lid and fill the tank with fresh, clean adhesive to within 25
mm (1 in.) of the top of the tank. Close the lid.
6. Place a drain pan under the drain valves in the melter manifold and
under all applicator dispensing modules.
7. Wait for the READY light on the Vista control panel to turn on.
8. Relieve system pressure by triggering the applicators.
9. See Figure 4-21. Using a screwdriver, open the drain valves in the
melter manifold by turning the drain valve screws counterclockwise.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-37

410500009

Figure 4-21 Opening a drain valve

CAUTION: Risk of equipment damage. Do not start the pump when the
system is cold or if there is no adhesive in the system. Ensure that the
system is at application temperature and is filled with adhesive before
starting the pump.

10. Place the motor start/stop switch in the on (I) position to start the pump.
11. Slowly turn the motor speed dial to increase the pump speed until
adhesive is flowing from the manifold drain valves. Allow the adhesive to
flow until it is clean and free of contaminants.
12. Stop the pump.
13. Close the drain valves by turning the drain valve screw clockwise.
14. Flush the hoses and applicators by following the flushing procedure in
the applicator manual.
15. After you have finished all system flushing tasks, install nozzles on the
applicators. Refer to the applicator manual.
16. If applicable, continue to the next procedure to adjust the circulation
control valves.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-38 Setup

Adjusting a Circulation Control Valve


A circulation control valve is an adjustable valve that controls the amount of
adhesive that is recirculated to the tank or reservoir by splitting the adhesive
flow between the applicators and the recirculation loop. This minimizes the
operating pressure differences between the applicator-open and
applicator-closed states, resulting in more consistent adhesive patterns.

1. Place the motor start/stop switches in the off (O) position.


2. Install a pressure gauge in an unused hose port. If needed, refer to
Section 11, Parts, for a pressure gauge part number.
3. See Figure 4-22. Loosen the locking nut (1) on the circulation control
valve to be adjusted.
4. Turn the circulation control valve adjustment screw (2) all the way
clockwise. At this setting, the valve is closed and no adhesive is
recirculating.

410500010

Figure 4-22 Adjusting a circulation control valve


1. Locking nut 2. Adjustment screw

5. Start the pump for the adhesive stream for which you are adjusting the
circulation control valve.
6. Open the applicators and adjust the pump speed until the desired output
rate is obtained. Note and record the operating pressure.
7. Turn the circulation control valve to the maximum recirculation setting by
turning the adjustment screw all the way counterclockwise. At this
setting, the valve is fully open.
8. Close the applicators and adjust the pump speed until an output rate
that is approximately two to three times the required output rate is
obtained. Note and record the pump speed.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-39

9. With the pump running at the same rate as in step 8, slowly turn the
circulation control valve adjustment screw clockwise until the pressure
gauge reads approximately the same operating pressure you noted in
step 6.
10. Check the output rate of the applicators by taking flow (weight) samples
over a fixed time period. Turn the circulation control valve adjustment
screw to change the output as necessary and recheck the output rate
with another sample. Continue this process until the proper output rate
is achieved. Record the final pressure reading when the proper output
rate is obtained.
11. When the desired circulation control valve setting has been obtained,
tighten the locking nut on the circulation control valve.
12. If you have a second adhesive stream, repeat this procedure for the
circulation control valve for that stream.

Record of Vista Control System Settings


Use this tables to record your Vista control system settings—they will be
useful if you ever need to reprogram the system.

Record of System Settings

Feature Default Setting Range of Possible Settings Your Setting


Password enable Off (0) Off (0) or On (1)
System-ready time delay 18 minutes 0−60 minutes
Overtemperature setpoint 218 °C (425 °F) 52−246 °C (125−475°F)
Celsius/Fahrenheit display Fahrenheit Celsius or Fahrenheit
Global temperature band 17 _C (30 °F) 6−28 °C (10−50 °F)
Individual temperature bands 17 _C (30 °F) 6−28 °C (10−50 °F)
Sequential or simultaneous startup Sequential (1) Sequential (1) or
Simultaneous (0)
Display heater proportioning No display (0) No display (0) or
Show display (1)
System warning or power on/off Warning (0) Warning (0) or
status Power (1)
System ready or motor on/off status Ready (1) Motor (0) or
Ready (1)
Auto-energize heaters On (1) On (1) or Off (0)

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-40 Setup

Record of Operating Temperature Setpoints

Zone
Range of
Zone Number Default Setpoint Your Operating
Zone Name Possible Setpoints
Type (See (See Note B) Temperature Setpoint
(See Note C)
Note A)
Internal - - - - 38−232 °C
1 Reservoir
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
2 Grid
(100−450 °F)
Hose - - - - 38−232 °C
1 Hose 1
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
2 Hose 2
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
3 Hose 3
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
4 Hose 4
(100−450 °F)
Applicator - - - - 38−232 °C
1 Applicator 1
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
2 Applicator 2
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
3 Applicator 3
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
4 Applicator 4
(100−450 °F)
NOTE A: If you connected heated air zones to the melter, these zone numbers would represent the heated-air zones rather
than a hose or applicator zone.
B: The four dashes (- - - -) mean that no operating temperature setpoint has been programmed.
C: For a zone to be on, the operating temperature setpoint must be at or above 38 °C (100 °F).

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-41

Record of Standby Temperature Setpoints

Zone
Range of
Zone Number Default Setpoint Your Standby
Zone Name Possible Setpoints
Type (See (See Note B) Temperature Setpoint
(See Note C)
Note A)
Internal - - - - 38−232 °C
1 Reservoir
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
2 Grid
(100−450 °F)
Hose - - - - 38−232 °C
1 Hose 1
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
2 Hose 2
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
3 Hose 3
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
4 Hose 4
(100−450 °F)
Applicator - - - - 38−232 °C
1 Applicator 1
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
2 Applicator 2
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
3 Applicator 3
(100−450 °F)
- - - - 38−232 °C
4 Applicator 4
(100−450 °F)
NOTE A: If you connected heated air zones to the melter, these zone numbers would represent the heated-air zones rather
than a hose or applicator zone.
B: The four dashes (- - - -) mean that no operating temperature setpoint has been programmed.
C: For a zone to be on, the operating temperature setpoint must be at or above 38 °C (100 °F).

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-42 Setup

Record of Heaters On/Off Times

Your Heaters On/Off Times


Day C
D Code
d Default On/Off Times Range off P
R Possible
ibl Times
Ti
INTERVAL 1 INTERVAL 2
(Day) (See Note A)
Interval 1 Interval 2 On Off On Off
On at - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
1 6:00 A.M.
(Monday) Off at
5:00 P.M.
On at - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
2 6:00 A.M.
(Tuesday) Off at
5:00 P.M.
On at - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
3 6:00 A.M.
(Wednesday) Off at
5:00 P.M.
On at - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
4 6:00 A.M.
(Thursday) Off at
5:00 P.M.
On at - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
5 6:00 A.M.
(Friday) Off at
5:00 P.M.
6 - - - - - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
(Saturday)
7 - - - - - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
(Sunday)
NOTE A: The four dashes (- - - -) mean that the heaters on feature has not been programmed for the indicated day of the
week.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Setup 4-43

Record of Enter/Exit Standby Times

Your Enter/Exit Standby Times


Day C
D Code
d Default Times Range off P
R Possible
ibl Times
Ti
INTERVAL 1 INTERVAL 2
(Day) (See Note A)
Interval 1 Interval 2 Enter Exit Enter Exit
Enter at - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
1 12:00 P.M.
(Monday) Exit at
1:00 P.M.
Enter at - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
2 12:00 P.M.
(Tuesday) Exit at
1:00 P.M.
Enter at - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
3 12:00 P.M.
(Wednesday) Exit at
1:00 P.M.
Enter at - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
4 12:00 P.M.
(Thursday) Exit at
1:00 P.M.
Enter at - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
5 12:00 P.M.
(Friday) Exit at
1:00 P.M.
6 - - - - - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
(Saturday)
7 - - - - - - - - - - - - and 00:01−24:00
(Sunday)
NOTE A: The four dashes (- - - -) mean that the standby feature has not been programmed for the indicated day of the week.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


4-44 Setup

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Operation 5-1

Section 5
Operation

WARNING: Allow only personnel with appropriate training and experience


to operate or service the equipment. The use of untrained or inexperienced
personnel to operate or service the equipment can result in injury, including
death, to themselves and others, and damage to the equipment.

Introduction
This section provides procedures for operating the melter and monitoring
the hot melt system. It is organized as follows:
S Operating Procedures
S Monitoring Procedures
S Troubleshooting
S Record of Warnings and Faults
Before operating the melter for the first time, make sure you have

S completed the mechanical and electrical installation procedures in


Section 3, Installation
S customized the Vista and motor control systems for your operation
using Section 4, Setup
S flushed the system and adjusted the circulation control valves by
completing the system flushing and circulation control valve
adjustment procedures in Section 4, Setup
Before performing any operating procedures, review Section 1, Safety.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


5-2 Operation

Operating Procedures
Use these procedures to operate the hot melt system. Refer to the next part
of this section, Monitoring Procedures, for procedures for monitoring the
system during normal operation. See Figure 5-1 as needed.

10

8
2

41100009

Figure 5-1 Operating controls


1. Motor start/stop switch 6. CLOCK key
2. Motor speed dial 7. PUMP key
3. Gear-to-line/manual switch 8. Main disconnect switch
4. STANDBY key 9. READY light
5. HEATERS key 10. POWER switch

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Operation 5-3

Turning the Clock on and Off


See Figure 5-1. If you want the automatic functions to occur (heaters on/off
and enter/exit standby), press the CLOCK key (6) on the Vista control panel
to turn the clock on. The CLOCK light turns on when the clock is on. To
program the automatic functions, refer to Section 4, Setup.

NOTE: If the clock is on when the main disconnect switch is turned off, the
clock will automatically turn on when the main disconnect switch is turned
back on.

Starting the Melter


Follow this procedure to start the melter.

1. If the melter is programmed to start automatically, go to step 5.


NOTE: The clock must be on for the automatic startup (heaters on)
function to work. To program the melter to start automatically, refer to
Programming Clock Settings in Section 4, Setup.

2. See Figure 5-1. Place the main disconnect switch (8) in the ON position.
3. Place the Vista POWER switch (10) in the ON position.
NOTE: If desired, you can leave the Vista POWER switch in the ON
position at all times.

4. If the auto-energize heaters feature is disabled, press the HEATERS key


(5) to turn the heaters on. The HEATERS light will turn on.
NOTE: Refer to Programming System Settings in Section 4, Setup, to
program the auto-energize heaters feature.

5. Ensure that
S no warning or fault exists
S the operating temperature setpoints are correct
S there is enough adhesive in the hopper (refer to Adding Adhesive)
6. Wait for the READY light (9) to turn on.
NOTE: If the system-ready time delay feature is enabled, the
multipurpose display will show the number of minutes remaining until the
system will be ready for operation. Refer to Programming System
Settings in Section 4, Setup, to program the system-ready time delay
feature.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


5-4 Operation

Starting the Melter (contd)


7. To run the system in the manual mode:
NOTE: If desired, you can install remote devices to start and stop the
motors or to place the motors in the manual or gear-to-line mode. Refer
to Connecting Input/Output Wiring in Section 3, Installation.

a. If the PUMP light on the Vista control panel is not on, press the
PUMP key (7).
b. Push the motor start/stop switch (1) to the off (O) position.
c. Place the gear-to-line/manual switch (3) in the HAND (manual)
position.
d. Set the motor speed dial (2) to 0.
e. Push the motor start/stop switch to the on (I) position.
f. Turn the motor speed dial until until the speed (F) shown on the
motor drive keypad is at the desired rpm. If necessary, refer to
Calculating Pump Speed Settings for Manual-Mode Operation in
Section 4, Setup.
To run the system in the gear-to-line mode:
NOTE: If desired, you can install remote devices to start and stop the
motor or to place the motor in the manual or gear-to-line mode. Refer to
Connecting Input/Output Wiring in Section 3, Installation.

a. If the PUMP light on the Vista control panel is not on, press the
PUMP key (7).
b. Set the motor speed dial (2) to 5.
c. Place the gear-to-line/manual switch (3) in the G position.
d. Push the motor start/stop switch (1) to the on (I) position. The pump
will start when the production line starts and provides the line-speed
input signal.
NOTE: To use the gear-to-line capability, you must install a
line-speed signal generator and connect wiring to the appropriate
terminals on the input/output terminal block. Refer to Installing a
Line-Speed Signal Generator and Connecting Input/Output Wiring in
Section 3, Installation.
e. If necessary, use the motor speed dial to trim the pump output.
8. Enable the applicators.
9. Start the production line.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Operation 5-5

Adding Adhesive
Follow this procedure to add adhesive to the melter.

1. Open the hopper lid and check the adhesive level.


2. Refill the hopper before the adhesive level drops below 50%. Add
adhesive to within 25 mm (1 in.) of the top of the hopper.
3. Close the hopper lid.

Changing Adhesive
If you want to change the type of adhesive you are using and the old and
new adhesives are compatible, pump all of the old adhesive out of the
system and add the new adhesive to the hopper. If the old and new
adhesives are not compatible, flush the system using the system-flushing
procedure earlier in this section, or clean the system using the system
cleaning procedure in Section 6, Maintenance. Contact the adhesive
supplier for information on the compatibility of adhesives.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


5-6 Operation

Using the Standby Function


Follow this procedure to place the melter in standby mode or to take it out of
standby mode. The HEATERS light on the Vista control panel must be on
for the standby function to work.

NOTE: You can program the melter to automatically enter and exit the
standby mode at specified times. Refer to Programming Clock Settings in
Section 4, Setup. The clock must be on for the automatic standby function
to work.
1. See Figure 5-1. To place the melter in standby mode, press the
STANDBY key (4) on the Vista control panel. When the standby feature
is enabled
S the STANDBY light on the Vista control panel turns on
S the READY light on the Vista control panel turns off
S the pumps stop
S the temperatures of all zones drop to their standby temperature
setpoints
2. To remove the melter from standby mode:
a. Press the STANDBY key. When the standby feature is disabled
S the HEATERS light on the Vista control panel turns on
S the STANDBY light on the Vista control panel turns off
S the heaters turn on and all zones begin heating
S the READY light on the Vista control panel turns on after all
zones have reached their operating temperature setpoints
b. Start the pumps.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Operation 5-7

Shutting Down the Melter


Follow this procedure to shut down the melter.

1. Stop the production line.


2. Stop the pump by pushing the motor start/stop switches to the off (O)
position.
3. Place a drain pan under all applicator dispensing modules and trigger
the applicators to relieve system pressure.
4. Disable the applicators.
5. If the melter is programmed to stop automatically, skip the rest of this
procedure.
6. Press the HEATERS key on the Vista control panel to turn the heaters
off. The HEATERS light will turn off.
7. Place the main disconnect switch in the OFF position.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


5-8 Operation

Monitoring Procedures
Use these procedures to monitor your system during normal operation. See
Figure 5-2 as needed.

1 2

9
6
7

10 8

11

610400013

Figure 5-2 Monitoring controls


1. FAULT light 7. SYSTEM SETTINGS light
2. READY light 8. Up and down arrow keys in
3. Selector display system setup area
4. Multipurpose display 9. Up arrow key under selector
display
5. Actual-temperature display
10. MONITOR/SCAN key
6. INTERNAL, HOSE, and GUN lights
11. CLEAR FAULTS key

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Operation 5-9

Monitoring the Vista Control Panel


Table 5-1 provides an explanation of the lights and displays on the Vista
control panel.

Table 5-1 Vista Control Panel Lights and Displays


Item No. in
Component Description
Figure 5-2
1 FAULT light This red light turns on when a fault occurs. Refer to Vista Control System
Indicating a Warning or Fault in Section 7, Electrical System, to
troubleshoot faults.
2 READY light This green light turns on when all zones have reached their operating
temperature setpoints, indicating that the melter is in the system-ready
condition.
3 Selector During normal operation, this display shows a number that represents a
display heated zone, as shown in Table 5-2. When a warning or fault occurs, the
display shows either the number of the problem zone or the letter F. Refer
to Vista Control System Indicating a Warning or Fault in Section 7,
Electrical System, to troubleshoot warnings and faults.
4 Multipurpose During normal operation, this display shows the operating temperature
display setpoint of the heated zone shown in the selector display. When a
warning or fault occurs, this display shows a warning code, a fault code,
or a fault-code number. Refer to Vista Control System Indicating a
Warning or Fault in Section 7, Electrical System, to troubleshoot warnings
and faults.
5 Actual- During normal operation, this display shows the actual temperature of the
temperature heated zone shown in the selector display.
display
6 INTERNAL, These lights work in combination with the number shown in the selector
HOSE, and display to represent a specific heated zone, as shown in Table 5-2.
GUN lights
7 SYSTEM This yellow light turns on when the Vista control system is in the
SETTINGS programming mode. Refer to Checking Your Programmed Settings later
light in this section.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


5-10 Operation

Monitoring the Vista Control Panel (contd)

Table 5-2 Meaning of Zone Numbers Shown in Selector Display


Zone Number Zone represented if the...
i S
in Selector
l t HOSE GUN
Display INTERNAL
light is on light is on
light is on
(See Note A) (See Note B) (See Note B)
1 Reservoir Hose 1 Applicator 1
2 Grid (if applicable) Hose 2 Applicator 2
3 Hose 3 Applicator 3
4 Hose 4 Applicator 4
NOTE A: For example, if the selector display shows the number 2 and the
HOSE light is on, then the represented zone is hose 2.
B: If you have heated air zones, the zone number that appears in the
selector display will be one of the hose or applicator (gun) zone
numbers.

Monitoring or Scanning Zone Temperatures


The Vista control system provides two modes for checking zone
temperatures: the scan mode or the monitor mode. See Figure 5-2. Press
the MONITOR/SCAN key (10) in the system control area of the Vista control
panel to toggle between the monitor and scan modes.

In the scan mode. the system scans each zone and displays the zone
temperatures in sequence. In the monitor mode, the system displays the
temperature of the zone currently selected.

The MONITOR/SCAN light stays on until the melter is placed in the


programming mode (by selecting a setting from the system setup area). If
no action is taken within two minutes, the control system will automatically
return to the monitor/scan mode.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Operation 5-11

Checking Your Programmed Settings


Follow this procedure to check your programmed settings.

1. See Figure 5-2. Press the up or down arrow keys (8) in the system
setup area of the Vista control panel until the SYSTEM SETTINGS
light (7) turns on.
2. Press the up arrow key (9) under the selector display (3) until the
number of the feature you want to check appears in the display. Refer to
the Vista Control System Features, Default Settings, and Optional
Settings table in Section 4, Setup, for feature numbers and descriptions.
3. Check the multipurpose display (4) to determine the setting for the
feature.
4. To change a setting, refer to Programming System Settings in Section 4,
Setup.
5. When you have finished checking your settings, press the
MONITOR/SCAN key (10) to exit the programming mode.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


5-12 Operation

Checking the Warning or Fault Log


Follow this procedure to check the warning or fault log. The warning and
fault logs list the causes of the three most recent warnings or faults.

1. See Figure 5-2. Press the up or down arrow keys (8) in the system
setup area of the Vista control panel until the SYSTEM SETTINGS
light (7) turns on.
2. Press the up arrow key (9) under the selector display (3) until the feature
number of the warning or fault you want to check appears in the selector
display. Refer to Tables 5-3 and 5-4 for the warning and fault log feature
numbers.
When a warning or fault feature number appears in the selector display,
the multipurpose display (4) shows two numbers: one that represents
the problem zone and one that represents the warning or fault that
occurred. Refer to Tables 5-5 through 5-7 for an explanation of the zone
numbers, warning numbers, and feature numbers.
The actual-temperature display (5) shows the amount of time the
heaters had been on when the warning or fault occurred.
NOTE: To move through the feature numbers in increments of 10, press
the right arrow key in the system settings area.

3. Press the CLEAR FAULTS key (11) to delete warnings from the warning
log. Faults cannot be deleted. Refer to Section 7, Electrical System, to
troubleshoot warnings and faults.
4. If desired, record warnings and faults on the tables provided in Record
of Warnings and Faults at the end of this section.

Table 5-3 Warning Log Feature Numbers


Feature No. Warning Represented
35 Most recent warning
36 Second most recent warning
37 Third most recent warning

Table 5-4 Fault Log Feature Numbers


Feature No. Fault Represented
27 Most recent fault
28 Second most recent fault
29 Third most recent fault

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Operation 5-13

Table 5-5 Zone Numbers Shown in Warning and Fault Logs


Zone Number Zone Represented
0 Reservoir
1 Grid
2 Hose 1
3 Hose 2
4 Hose 3
5 Hose 4
8 Applicator 1
9 Applicator 2
10 Applicator 3
11 Applicator 4

Table 5-6 Meaning of Warning Numbers


Warning Number Meaning
2 Open RTD
3 Shorted RTD
4 Zone temperature out-of-band or zone
undertemperature

Table 5-7 Meaning of Fault Numbers


Fault Number Meaning
0 No fault
1 Zone undertemperature (see Note)
2 Open RTD
3 Shorted RTD
4 Zone overtemperature
5 Defective control board
6 Brownout occurred
NOTE: An undertemperature warning is logged into the warning log as
an out-of-band warning. It is also logged into the fault log, but it is not a
fault.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


5-14 Operation

Running a System Test


See Figure 5-2. Press the CLEAR FAULTS key (11) in the system controls
area of the Vista control panel to run a system test. During the five-second
test:
S all lights on the control panel turn on
S the information in the displays area changes
If you pressed the CLEAR FAULTS key after correcting a problem that
caused the control system to indicate a fault, refer to Table 5-8 to determine
whether the problem was corrected.

Table 5-8 Control System Indications When System Test is Complete


Problem Corrected? Result
The FAULT light turn off when the test is
Yes complete and the system enters the
monitor/scan mode.
The FAULT light stays on when the test is
complete. Refer to Troubleshooting or
No
Checking the Warning or Fault Log earlier in
this section.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Operation 5-15

Troubleshooting
When the Vista or motor control system indicates a warning or fault, or
whenever any other problem arises during operation of the system, refer to
the troubleshooting tables located in the other sections of this manual.
Table 5-9 shows the location of the troubleshooting tables.

NOTE: If desired, use tables in Record of Warnings and Faults at the end
of this section to track warnings and faults.

Table 5-9 Location of Troubleshooting Tables


Problem Location of Troubleshooting Table
S Melter not powering on Section 7, Electrical System
S Vista control system settings changed or lost
S Zone not heating
S Vista control system indicating a warning or NOTE: To check for a motor control system
fault warning or fault, lower the Vista control panel and
S Motor control system indicating a warning or look at the display on the motor drive keypad
fault located inside the electrical enclosure.

S Adhesive leaking from the hopper or reservoir Section 8, Hydraulic System


S Adhesive not applying properly
S Pump not working
S Motor stopped or not running properly Section 9, Drive System
S Hose leaking or blocked Section 10, Hoses

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


5-16 Operation

Record of Warnings and Faults


Make copies of these tables to record warning and faults for tracking and
trending purposes.

Record of Warnings
Warning
Number or Problem
Date Action Taken/Comments
Code Zone
(See Note A)

NOTE A: The Vista control system warning numbers are as follows: 2=open RTD, 3=shorted RTD, 4=zone out of
band or undertemperature. Motor control system warning codes are shown on the motor drive keypad
display.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Operation 5-17

Record of Faults
Fault
Number or Problem
Date Action Taken/Comments
Code Zone
(See Note A)

NOTE A: The Vista control system fault numbers are as follows: 0=no fault, 1=zone undertemperature (see
Note B), 2=open RTD, 3=shorted RTD, 4=zone overtemperature, 5=defective control board, 6=brownout
occurred. Motor control system fault codes are shown on the motor drive keypad display.
B: Although an undertemperature condition is indicated in the fault log, it is not a fault.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


5-18 Operation

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Maintenance 6-1

Section 6
Maintenance

WARNING: Allow only personnel with appropriate training and experience


to operate or service the equipment. The use of untrained or inexperienced
personnel to operate or service the equipment can result in injury, including
death, to themselves and others, and damage to the equipment.

Introduction
Performing routine maintenance can extend the life of the melter and
decrease the downtime needed for repairs. This section provides a
schedule of recommended maintenance activities and frequencies as well
as procedures for some maintenance activities. It is organized as follows:
S Tools and Supplies
S Recommended Maintenance Activities and Schedule
S Maintenance Procedures

WARNING: Attempting any other maintenance procedures can result in


equipment damage, improper system operation, or personal injury.

Before performing any maintenance procedures, review Section 1, Safety.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


6-2 Maintenance

Tools and Supplies


To perform maintenance or repairs, you will need a well-stocked tool kit that
includes:
S a set of metric socket wrenches
S a set of metric Allen (hex) wrenches
S a set of metric T-handle hex keys
S a set of metric open-ended wrenches
S flat-blade and Phillips-head screwdrivers
S drain pans and large waste containers
S other tools and supplies as noted
You will also need a sufficient inventory of spare parts and supplies. Each
maintenance and repair procedure in this manual is preceded by a list of the
parts and supplies you will need. Refer to Section 11, Parts, for the part
numbers for all parts and supplies.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Maintenance 6-3

Recommended Maintenance Activities and


Schedule
Use Table 6-1 to develop a maintenance schedule for the melter. Base how
often you perform maintenance on the needs of your operating
environment.

Table 6-1 Recommended Maintenance Activities and Schedule


Frequency Maintenance Activity
As needed S Clean or replace the manifold filter screens. Refer to Cleaning or
Replacing a Manifold Filter Screen in this section.
Daily S Check the hydraulic connections for adhesive leaks. If a connection
is leaking, replace the O-ring for the fitting installed at the
connection. Refer to Replacing a Manifold Fitting O-Ring in
Section 8, Hydraulic System.
Weekly S Clean the exterior surfaces of the melter and the applicators. Use a
cleaning fluid recommended in the Technical Data Sheet (TDS) for
the adhesive being used. The cleaning fluid should be fast-drying
and should leave no residue.
S Clean removable nozzles. Refer to the applicator manuals.
Monthly S Clean the inside of the electrical enclosure and check the electrical
connections. Tighten any loose connections.
S Check the pump gland bolt and tighten the bolt if leakage is found.
Refer to Tightening the Pump Gland Bolt in this section.
Every 500 hours of operation S Tighten the pump screws. Refer to Tightening the Pump Screws in
this section.
Every 6,000 or 12,000 hours or S If the application temperature of the adhesive is >80 _C (176 _F),
operation (or every 4 years or replace the motor transmission grease every 6,000 hours of
6 years) based on the operation, or at least every 4 years. Refer to Replacing the Motor
application temperature of the Transmission Grease in this section.
adhesive S If the application temperature of the adhesive is ≤80 _C (176 _F),
replace the motor transmission grease every 12,000 hours of
operation, or at least every 6 years. Refer to Replacing the Motor
Transmission Grease in this section.
Annually (or as needed) S Clean the motor fan cover. Usually once per month is sufficient, but
if dust accumulates quickly clean the cover more often—every day if
necessary.
S Clean the filter behind the fan cover on the left-side panel.
S Clean the circulation control valve. Refer to Cleaning or Replacing a
Circulation Control Valve in Section 8, Hydraulic System.
S Clean the system. Refer to Cleaning the System in this section.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


6-4 Maintenance

Heater Run-Time Check


Follow this procedure to determine the total number of hours the
system has been running with the heaters on.

1. See Figure 6-1. Press the up or down arrow key (1) in the
system setup area of the Vista control panel until the
SYSTEM SETTINGS light (2) turns on.

2. Press the up arrow key (3) under the selector display (4) until
Feature 26 appears in the display.

3. Check the multipurpose (5) and actual-temperature (6)


displays. Read them from left to right to see the total number
of hours that the system has been running with the heaters
on, up to 999,999 hours.

3
6

610400014

Figure 6-1 Checking the run time of the heaters


1. Up and down arrow keys 4. Selector display
2. SYSTEM SETTINGS light 5. Multipurpose display
3. Up arrow 6. Actual-temperature display

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Maintenance 6-5

Maintenance Procedures
Use these maintenance procedures as directed by Table 6-1 or as needed
for your operation. Be sure to relieve system pressure before performing
any maintenance activity.

Relieving System Pressure


System pressure must be properly relieved before you can safely proceed
with many of the maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair procedures in
this manual. Follow this procedure whenever you need to relieve system
pressure. If you have two adhesive streams, relieve pressure in both
streams.

WARNING: Risk of burns. Failure to relieve system pressure can cause hot
adhesive to spray from a connecting point, possibly causing serious burns.
Relieve system pressure before loosening or removing a hose, an
applicator module, or any other part of the hot melt system. Wear
heat-protective clothing, safety goggles (ANSI Z87.1-1989 or equivalent),
and safety gloves.

1. Stop the pump and place the system in the manual mode.
2. Ensure that the system is at application temperature.
3. Place drain pans under the melter drain valves, the applicator drain
valves (if applicable), and the applicator nozzles.
4. See Figure 6-2. Open the drain valves in the melter and applicator (if
applicable) manifolds.
5. Trigger the applicator dispensing modules.
6. Close all drain valves.

410500009

Figure 6-2 Opening a melter manifold drain valve

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


6-6 Maintenance

Cleaning Parts
Many of the maintenance and repair procedures in this manual require you
to clean parts. Use one of the cleaning methods shown in Table 6-2
whenever you need to clean parts.

WARNING: Do not clean any part of a pressurized fluid system in


halogenated hydrocarbon solvent. Use of halogenated hydrocarbon solvent
could cause an explosion. Refer to Section 1, Safety, for more information.

WARNING: Never apply an open flame to any component. An open flame


may cause an explosion or fire.

WARNING: Risk of fire. Serious injury or property damage could result from
uncontrolled heating of Nordson Type-R cleaning fluid with an open flame or
in an unregulated heating device. Use a controlled heating device, such as
a thermostatically controlled hot plate, to heat the cleaning fluid.

Table 6-2 Methods for Cleaning Parts


Cleaning Method Procedure
Nordson Type-R a. Place the parts in a controlled heating
cleaning fluid device containing Nordson Type-R cleaning
fluid and heat the fluid above the melting
point of the adhesive.

b. Scrub the parts with a fine-bristle


(non-metal) brush.
Electric heat gun a. Heat the parts with a flameless electric
heat gun.

b. Wipe the parts with a clean, dry cloth.


Ultrasonic cleaner a. Submerge the parts in an ultrasonic
cleaner filled with a solvent.

b. Wipe the parts with a clean, dry cloth.


Chemical cleaner a. Submerge the parts in a chemical cleaner.

b. Wipe the parts with a clean, dry cloth.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Maintenance 6-7

Cleaning or Replacing a Manifold Filter Screen


Follow this procedure to clean or replace a manifold filter screen. You will
need the following items:
S tool kit
S drain pan
S cleaning supplies (refer to Table 6-2)
S replacement filter screen (if needed)
S replacement O-ring
S O-ring lubricant
S anti-seize lubricant
NOTE: To prevent downtime, Nordson Corporation recommends
maintaining at least two complete filter assemblies so that a clean filter
assembly can be used while the dirty filter screen is being cleaned.

NOTE: If you are cleaning melter and applicator filter screens at the same
time, clean the melter filter screens first.

Remove the Filter


1. Relieve system pressure. Refer to Relieving System Pressure earlier in
this section.
2. Unscrew the filter and remove it from the manifold over a drain pan.
3. Wipe any spilled adhesive from the manifold and from the front of the
filter cavity.
NOTE: To return to operation immediately, install a spare filter. Refer to
Install the Filter later in this procedure.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


6-8 Maintenance

Clean or Replace the Filter Screen


1. See Figure 6-3. Disassemble the filter.

ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ 4
690100004

Figure 6-3 Manifold filter components


1. Bung 4. Filter screen
2. O-ring 5. Screw
3. Tube

2. Inspect the screen for damage. If there are any dents, tears, or
blockages in the mesh, obtain a new screen and skip to step 4.

CAUTION: Risk of equipment damage. Do not use a metal brush to clean a


filter screen. Use only a fine-bristle brush.

3. If the filter screen is not damaged, refer to Cleaning Parts earlier in this
section to clean it.
4. Apply O-ring lubricant to a new O-ring and reassemble the filter.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Maintenance 6-9

Install the Filter

CAUTION: Risk of equipment damage. To prevent damage to the filter


screen, the system must be at application temperature when the filter is
installed.

1. Ensure that the system is at application temperature.


2. Apply anti-seize lubricant to the filter threads and install the filter in the
manifold.
3. Use one of the following methods to purge air from the adhesive stream
for which the filter screen was cleaned or replaced:
S Remove the supply hose fitting and allow adhesive to drain from the
hose port until the air is purged (this is the quickest method).
S If the applicator that the adhesive stream supplies has a drain valve,
open the applicator drain valve and allow adhesive to drain from the
applicator until the air is purged.
4. Restore the system to normal operation.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


6-10 Maintenance

Tightening the Pump Gland Bolt


Adhesive may leak from the self-sealing pump shaft packing at regular
intervals. When leakage occurs, follow this procedure to tighten the pump
gland bolt.

1. Heat the system to application temperature.


2. Remove the melter left-side panel.
3. See Figure 6-4. Tighten the pump gland bolt approximately 1/4 turn in
the direction of pump rotation. When the bolt can no longer be tightened,
replace the pump. Refer to Replacing a Pump in Section 8, Hydraulic
System.

1 2

440300044

Figure 6-4 Tightening the pump gland bolt


1. Single-stream pump 2. Dual-stream pump

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Maintenance 6-11

Tightening the Pump Screws


The warming and cooling of the melter can cause the pump screws to
loosen. To tighten the pump screws, ensure that the melter is cold, remove
the melter left-side panel, and use a torque wrench to tighten the screws to
25 NSm (222 in.-lb). See Figure 6-5.

2
1

440300045

Figure 6-5 Tightening the pump screws


1. Single-stream pump 2. Dual-stream pump

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


6-12 Maintenance

Replacing the Motor Transmission Grease


Follow this procedure to replace the motor transmission grease. You will
need the following items:
S tool kit
S waste container
S cleaning agent for removing transmission grease
S 250 cc of transmission grease
1. Heat the system to application temperature.
2. Run the pump motor until the grease inside is warm (about 10 minutes).
3. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the system.
4. Remove the motor. Refer to Drive System Component Replacement in
Section 9, Drive System, as needed.
5. See Figure 6-6. Unscrew the reducer from the motor and rinse out the
casing with a suitable cleaning agent, removing all transmission grease
residue.
6. Fill the reducer with 250 cc of transmission grease and reinstall the
reducer on the motor.
7. Reinstall the motor and restore the system to normal operation.

1 2

Figure 6-6 Location of the reducer on a Brook Hansen motor and an SEW
Eurodrive motor
1. Brook Hansen motor 2. SEW Eurodrive motor

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Maintenance 6-13

Cleaning the System


Use these procedures to periodically clean the system. System cleaning
removes dirt and char that can clog the system and cause poor system
performance. You should also clean the system if you switch to a new type
of adhesive that is incompatible with the old adhesive. If you are not sure
whether the adhesives are compatible, contact the adhesive supplier.

You will need the following items:


S tool kit
S waste containers
S disposable rags
S stiff, high-temperature plastic scraper
S adhesive (the previous adhesive or the new adhesive)
S replacement manifold filter

Drain the System


Before the system can be cleaned, you must drain all the adhesive from the
system. This can be accomplished by running the system until all the
adhesive is consumed or by pumping the adhesive out as waste. The
system can be drained through an applicator, a hose, or the manifold drain
valve. Follow this procedure to drain the system.

1. Stop the pump and place the system in the manual mode.
2. Relieve system pressure. Refer to Relieving System Pressure earlier in
this section.
3. Follow these steps to pump the adhesive out through an applicator:
a. Remove the applicator nozzle.
b. Place a waste container under the applicator.
c. Open the applicator and start the pump.
d. When all the adhesive has been pumped out, close the applicator
and stop the pump.
4. Follow these steps to pump the adhesive out through a hose:
a. Disable the applicators by setting the applicators temperature
setpoint to the default setting (− − −). Refer to Programming Vista
Control System Settings in Section 4, Setup, as needed.
b. Disconnect a hose from its applicator and secure it over a waste
container.
c. Start the pump.
d. When all the adhesive has been pumped out, stop the pump.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


6-14 Maintenance

Drain the System (contd)


5. Follow these steps to pump the adhesive out through a manifold drain
valve:
a. Place a waste container under the drain valve.
b. Open the drain valve.
c. Start the pump.
d. When all the adhesive has been pumped out, stop the pump and
close the drain valve.

Clean the Tank


WARNING: Risk of burns. Nordson recommends that you wear welding
gloves with long cuffs when working inside the tank.

1. Place the main disconnect switch in the OFF position and wait for the
system to cool to about 93 _C (200 _F).
2. Use disposable rags to remove the remaining adhesive in the tank. To
loosen caked char, use a stiff high-temperature plastic scraper or similar
instrument. Be careful not to damage the PTFE coating.
3. Install a new manifold filter and close the drain valve.
4. Reconnect any hoses that were disconnected.

Flush the System


After you have thoroughly removed the adhesive and char from the system,
follow this procedure to flush the system using the adhesive you want to
run.

1. Fill the tank with adhesive to within 25 mm (1 in.) of the top of the tank.
2. Start the melter and wait for the READY light to turn on.
3. Open the manifold drain valves.
4. Start the pump.
5. Allow adhesive to flow from the drain valves until all contaminants and
air are purged from the filter cavities.
6. Stop the pump.
7. Close the drain valves.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Maintenance 6-15

8. Disable the applicators by setting the applicators temperature setpoint to


the default setting (− − −). Refer to Programming Vista Control System
Settings in Section 4, Setup, as needed.
9. Disconnect hose 1 from applicator 1 and secure the hose over a waste
container.
10. Start the pump and flush the hose until the adhesive flowing from the
hose is free of air and contaminants.
11. Stop the pump.
12. Repeat steps 9−11 for each hose, one at a time, until all hoses have
been flushed.
13. Reconnect all hoses to the applicators and remove all applicator
nozzles.
14. Place a waste container under the applicators.
15. Start the pump.
16. Trigger the applicators open one at a time, allowing adhesive to flow
until it is free of air and contaminants.
17. Stop the pump.
18. Reinstall the applicator nozzles.
19. Restore the system to normal operation. Be sure to return all heated
zones to their usual operating temperature setpoints.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


6-16 Maintenance

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-1

Section 7
Electrical System

WARNING: Allow only personnel with appropriate training and experience


to operate or service the equipment. The use of untrained or inexperienced
personnel to operate or service the equipment can result in injury, including
death, to themselves and others, and damage to the equipment.

Introduction
This section provides troubleshooting and repair procedures for the melter’s
electrical system. It is organized as follows:
S Electrical System Overview
S Troubleshooting Tables
S Troubleshooting Procedures
S Repair Procedures
Troubleshooting of the electrical system begins when a component will not
heat or when a control system alerts you of a problem through an alarm or
visual display. If you try all the troubleshooting suggestions in this section
and still need assistance solving electrical system problems, contact your
Nordson representative.

Before performing any troubleshooting or repair activities, review Section 1,


Safety.

The following sections of this manual contain additional information on the


electrical system:

S Section 3, Installation, includes procedures for connecting cordsets,


connecting input/output wiring, and connecting power.
S Section 4, Setup, includes procedures for programming the Vista
and motor control systems.
S Section 5, Operation, includes procedures for operating and
monitoring the melter system through the Vista and motor control
systems.
S Section 12, Technical Data, contains torque specifications and wiring
diagrams.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-2 Electrical System

Introduction (contd)

You will need a well-stocked tool kit and a sufficient inventory of spare parts
and supplies. Each repair procedure is preceded by a list of the items you
will need. Refer to Tools and Supplies in Section 6, Maintenance, for a list of
recommended tools and supplies. Refer to Section 11, Parts, for the part
numbers of all parts and supplies and for a comprehensive list of
recommended spare parts and supplies.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-3

Electrical System Overview


The electrical system includes the Vista and motor control systems as well
as all the electrical components (such as power cables, wiring harnesses,
printed circuit boards, fuses, and relays) that are required to power the
melter.

Vista Control System


See Figure 7-1. The main component of the Vista control system is the Vista
control assembly, which includes the Vista control panel and three printed
circuit boards (hereafter referred to as boards). Refer to Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Vista Control Assembly Boards


Board Function
Power board Switches heater power for the system’s
heated components
Control board Contains the Vista firmware chip and controls
how the melter operates
Display board Allows the displays to function

1
2
5 3
4

610400015

Figure 7-1 Vista control assembly components


1. Power board 4. Control assembly frame
2. Control board 5. Vista control panel
3. Display board

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-4 Electrical System

Motor Control System


See Figure 7-2. The motor control system includes the motor controls, the
motor drive, and the motor cable.

NOTE: A motor drive may also be referred to as a variable frequency


inverter, or inverter.

SIEMENS

Hz
F

jog

Figure 7-2 Motor control system components


1. Motor controls 2. Motor drive 3. Motor cable

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-5

Troubleshooting Tables
The troubleshooting tables in this section describe the kinds of control
system problems you may encounter and provide corrective actions for
handling those problems. When necessary, the tables refer to more detailed
troubleshooting procedures.

Refer to the appropriate troubleshooting table for the type of problem you
are experiencing:
S Melter Not Powering On
S Vista Control System Settings Changed or Lost
S Zone Not Heating
S Vista Control System Indicating a Warning or Fault
S Motor Control System Indicating a Warning or Fault

Electrical Safety During Troubleshooting


Before performing troubleshooting activities inside the melter electrical
enclosure, you should exhaust all methods of troubleshooting the problem
outside the electrical enclosure or with the power off. The troubleshooting
tables and procedures in this section are organized using this methodology.
In general, perform troubleshooting activities as follows:

S Check the displays and lights for warnings, faults, and other status
information.
S Check your programmed settings to ensure that they have not been
changed. Refer to Checking Your Programmed Settings in Section 5,
Operation.
S Check for continuity and grounding between system components
(melter, applicators, hoses, and other equipment).
S Ensure that your branch circuit disconnect switch is properly
installed.
S Ensure that your power supply is supplying the proper voltage.
S Prioritize troubleshooting activities to limit exposure to live power.
Perform troubleshooting activities involving live power last.
S Understand your system electrically and mechanically before
opening the electrical enclosure. Pay special attention to system
power distribution and to input/output interfaces with other
equipment.
S Identify and eliminate potential electrical shock hazards in the
environment surrounding the melter.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-6 Electrical System

Melter Not Powering On


WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury, or death. Some
troubleshooting procedures require you to perform work inside the electrical
enclosure with the power on. Follow electrical safety procedures and
observe all high-voltage indicators. Refer to Electrical Safety During
Troubleshooting before performing any troubleshooting procedure.

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action


Displays on Vista control No input power Ensure that the power is turned on at
panel do not illuminate the branch circuit disconnect switch
and that the power supply is
or supplying the proper voltage to the
melter. Ensure that the main
displays illuminate but disconnect switch on the melter and
melter will not power on the Vista POWER switch are in the
and no faults are ON position.
displayed
Defective main disconnect switch With the switch in the ON position,
check for voltage on the output side
of the switch. If there is no voltage,
replace the switch.
Defective Vista POWER switch Check the POWER switch. Refer to
Checking the Vista POWER Switch in
the Troubleshooting Procedures part
of this section.
Incorrect voltage plug at X3 on Check for the correct plug. Refer to
Vista power board Checking the Voltage Plug on the
Vista Power Board in the
Troubleshooting Procedures part of
this section.
Blown fuse or fuses on Vista power Check the fuses on the Vista power
board board. See Figure 7-3 for the location
of the fuses (F1−F12). Replace blown
fuses.
Contactor K1 on Vista power board Toggle the Vista POWER switch off
not engaging and back on; then listen for the K1
contactor to engage (about
5 seconds). You can also visually
examine the contactor to see if it
engages. See Figure 7-3 for the
location of K1 on the Vista power
board. If K1 is not engaging, replace
the power board. Refer to Replacing
the Vista Control Assembly or an
Assembly Board in the Repair
Procedures part of this section.
Continued on next page

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-7

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action


Vista power board not properly Ensure that the power board is properly
connected to control board connected to the control board at XP1.
The pins from the control board should
extend through XP1 on the power board.
See Figure 7-3 for the location of XP1
on the boards.
Defective Vista power board or Replace the power board, the control
control board board, or the entire control assembly.
Refer to Replacing the Vista Control
Assembly or an Assembly Board in the
Repair Procedures part of this section.

1
2

X1

F1
F2
XP6 XP1
X3
F3 XP4A
F4 XP3
K1 X4
XP1 F5 XS3 XS4
XP5
F6 Q17
TB1
F7
F8 XP2
F11 F12
TB2 J4 X2 F9
XS2 XS1
F10 L1 L2 L3 N
123456 J9
J2
610402001

Figure 7-3 Location of connectors and fuses on Vista boards (fuses are behind a cover)
1. Power board 2. Control board

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-8 Electrical System

Vista Control System Settings Changed or Lost

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action


1. One or more settings Someone entered programming Reprogram the system settings.
changed mode and changed one or more Refer to Programming Vista Control
settings System Settings in Section 4, Setup.
Be sure to record your settings in the
Record of Vista Control System
Settings at the end of Section 4.
2. All settings lost Firmware upgraded to latest Reprogram the system settings.
version by replacing firmware chip Refer to Programming Vista Control
(all custom settings are lost during System Settings in Section 4, Setup.
this procedure and are replaced by Be sure to record your settings in the
the factory default settings) Record of Vista Control System
Settings at the end of Section 4.
Defective microprocessor chip Replace the control board. Refer to
Replacing the Vista Control Assembly
or an Assembly Board in the Repair
Procedures part of this section.
NOTE: Because the control system memory is stored on the microprocessor chip and does not require
the protection of a battery backup, your settings cannot be lost during a brownout or a power failure.

Zone Not Heating

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action


Any zone not heating No power to melter Ensure that the power at the main
branch circuit disconnect switch is on
and that the main disconnect switch
and the Vista POWER switch are in
the ON position.
Zone operating temperature Check the operating temperature
setpoint below 38 _C (100 _F) setpoint for the zone. The setpoint
must be 38 _C (100 _F) or above for
the zone to heat. Refer to
Programming Vista Control System
Settings in Section 4, Setup, to
program temperature setpoints.
Loose cordset connection Ensure that all cordset connections
are tight.
Damaged hose or applicator Repair the hose cordset connector (or
cordset connector replace the hose) or replace the
applicator cordset. Refer to Hose
Replacement in Section 10, Hoses, or
to the applicator manual.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-9

Vista Control System Indicating a Warning or Fault


When a warning occurs, the melter continues to function normally. When a
fault occurs, the red FAULT light turns on, the melter shuts down, and the
selector display, in combination with the INTERNAL, HOSE, or GUN light,
shows a number that represents the problem zone. Refer to Table 7-2 to
determine which zone is represented in the selector display. Refer to
Table 7-3 to troubleshoot faults.

NOTE: The Vista control system maintains a log of the three most recent
warnings and faults (except for fault-code faults). To check the warning or
fault log, refer to Checking the Warning or Fault Log in Section 5, Operation.

3
4
2

610400028

Figure 7-4 Displays and lights used to indicate a fault


1. FAULT light 4. Actual-temperature display
2. Selector display 5. INTERNAL, HOSE, and GUN
3. Multipurpose display lights

Table 7-2 Meaning of Zone Numbers Shown in Selector Display


Zone Number Zone represented if the...
i S
in Selector
l HOSE GUN
Display INTERNAL
light is on light is on
light is on
(See Note A) (See Note B) (See Note B)
1 Tank or reservoir Hose 1 Applicator 1
2 Grid (if applicable) Hose 2 Applicator 2
3 Hose 3 Applicator 3
4 Hose 4 Applicator 4
NOTE A: For example, if the selector display shows the number 2 and the
HOSE light is on, then the represented zone is hose 2.
B: If you have heated air zones, the zone number that appears in the
selector display will be one of the hose or applicator (gun) zone
numbers.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-10 Electrical System

Vista Control System Indicating a Warning or Fault (contd)

Table 7-3 Troubleshooting Vista Control System Warnings and Faults


FAULT
Warning Selector Multipurpose Cause of Warning
Light Corrective Action
or Fault Display Status Display Status or Fault
Status
Out-of-band Off Shows a zone Shows the The actual temperature Wait to see if the
warning number (refer operating of the zone indicated in temperature stabilizes
to Table 7-2) temperature the selector display is at the setpoint. You
setpoint for the out-of-band. may want to change
zone indicated (See Note B) your out-of-band
in the selector temperature setpoints.
display (See
Note A)
Under- Off Shows a zone Flashes UT The actual temperature Refer to
temperature number (refer of the zone indicated in Troubleshooting
warning to Table 7-2) the selector display is Undertemperature
more than 19.5 _C Conditions in the
(35 _F) below its Troubleshooting
operating temperature Procedures part of this
setpoint. (See Note C) section.
Over- On Shows a zone Flashes OT The actual temperature Refer to
temperature number (refer of the zone indicated in Troubleshooting
fault to Table 7-2) the selector display has Overtemperature
reached the Conditions in the
overtemperature Troubleshooting
setpoint entered in Procedures part of this
Feature 3. The default section.
overtemperature
setpoint is
218 _C (425 _F).
(See Note D)
RTD fault On Shows a zone Flashes RTD The RTD or RTD circuit Refer to Checking an
number (refer of the the zone RTD or RTD Circuit in
to Table 7-2) indicated in the selector the Troubleshooting
display is open or Procedures part of this
shorted. (See Note E) section.
NOTE A: If the melter is in the scan mode when an out-of-band temperature warning occurs, the control system
will stop scanning and freeze on the zone that is out of band. Press the MONITOR/SCAN key to
resume scanning.
B: You can choose the degree to which a zone’s temperature may deviate from its operating temperature
setpoint (Features 5−19) and still stay within the temperature band setpoints. Refer to Programming
System Settings in Section 4, Setup, to program out-of-band temperature setpoints.
C: An undertemperature condition is logged into the warning log as an out-of-band warning and causes the
warning output contact to open. It is also logged into the fault log, but it is not a fault condition.
D: Refer to Programming Temperature Settings in Section 4, Setup, to program overtemperature setpoints.
E: If the RTD is open, the actual-temperature display will show 260 _C (500 _F). If the RTD is shorted, the
actual-temperature display will show 0 _C (0 _F). When the control system detects an RTD problem, it
logs a warning in the warning log, opens the warning output contact, and starts a 2-minute countdown.
If the RTD problem disappears before the 2-minute countdown ends, the warning disappears and the
countdown stops. If the RTD problem still exists after the 2-minute countdown ends, the control system
logs a fault in the fault log, opens the fault output contact, and shuts the melter down. Nordson offers
two test plugs that simplify the troubleshooting of RTD faults. These test plugs help you quickly
determine whether there is a component RTD problem or a control system problem. Refer to Optional
Accessories in Section 11, Parts, for the kit part number.
Continued on next page

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-11

Table 7-3 Troubleshooting Vista Control System Warnings and Faults (contd)
FAULT
Warning Selector Multipurpose Cause of Warning
Light Corrective Action
or Fault Display Status Display Status or Fault
Status
Fault-code On Shows the Shows the The power board Tighten the power
fault letter F number 2 screws are loose, board screws to
causing a faulty 0.8−0.9 NSm
ground connection. (7−8 in.-lb).

Fault-code On Shows the Shows the The control board is Turn the melter off,
fault letter F number 1, 2, defective. then back on again to
3, 5, or 6 see if the problem
recurs. If it recurs,
replace the control
board or replace the
control assembly. Refer
to Replacing the Vista
Control Assembly or an
Assembly Board in the
Repair Procedures part
of this section.
Fault-code On Shows the Shows the There is a brownout Correct the cause of
fault letter F number 4 condition. (See Note E) the brownout.
Fault-code On Shows the Shows the The seven-day clock Replace the control
fault letter F number 7 battery is dead. board or the control
(See Note F) assembly. Refer to
Replacing the Vista
Control Assembly or an
Assembly Board in the
Repair Procedures part
of this section.
Fault-code On Shows the Shows the Memory (RAM) test Replace the Vista
fault letter F number 8 failure firmware chip or the
control board. Refer to
Replacing the Vista
Control Assembly or an
Assembly Board in the
Repair Procedures part
of this section.
Fault-code On Shows the Shows the Memory (ROM) test Replace the Vista
fault letter F number 9 failure firmware chip or the
control board. Refer to
Replacing the Vista
Control Assembly or an
Assembly Board in the
Repair Procedures part
of this section.
F: A brownout occurs when the power supply voltage falls below the voltage needed to maintain system
operation. When this happens, the control system stops normal operation. The system will resume
normal operation once the brownout condition is corrected.
G: If the melter and the clock function are turned on and the clock battery dies, the CLOCK light will flash.
If the melter is then subject to a power cycle or power interruption, the displays will indicate F7
(fault code 7). However, if the clock is not turned on and the clock battery dies, the control system will
not indicate a fault. When the clock battery is dead, the melter will continue to operate normally except
for any automatic functions.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-12 Electrical System

Motor Control System Indicating a Fault or Alarm


If the motor stops unexpectedly, check the display on the motor drive
keypad located inside the electrical enclosure. If the display shows a fault or
alarm code, refer to the following troubleshooting tables.

To reset the motor drive after a fault or alarm:


S Cycle the power to the drive.
S Press the Fn key.
S Apply an appropriate signal to digital input 3 (DIN3) (default setting).
NOTE: To check or change a motor control system parameter, refer to
Changing a Motor Control System Parameter in Section 4, Setup. This
procedure includes a list of the factory-set parameter values.

Table 7-4 Troubleshooting Motor Control System Faults


Fault Code Possible Cause Corrective Action Result
F0001 Motor power (P0307) does not Ensure the following: OFF2
Overcurrent correspond to inverter power (r0206)
S Motor power (P0307) must
Motor lead short circuit correspond to inverter power (r0206)
Earth faults
S Cable length limits must not be
exceeded
S Motor cable and motor must have no
short circuits or earth faults
S Motor parameters must match the
motor in use
S Value of stator resistance (P0350)
must be correct
S Motor must not be obstructed or
overloaded. Increase the ramp time
or reduce the boost level as
necessary.
F0002 DC-link voltage (r0026) exceeds trip Ensure the following: OFF2
Overvoltage level (P2172)
S Supply voltage (P0210) must lie
Overvoltage can be caused by high within limits indicated on rating plate
main supply voltage or by the motor
being in the regenerative mode. The S DC-link voltage controller must be
motor could be in the regenerative enabled (P1240) and parameterized
mode because of fast ramp-downs or properly
if it is being driven from an active load.
S Ramp-down time (P1121) must match
inertia of load
S Required braking power must lie
within specified limits
NOTE: Higher inertia requires longer
ramp times; otherwise,apply braking
resistor.
Continued...

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-13

Table 7-4 Troubleshooting Motor Control System Faults (contd)


Fault Code Possible Cause Corrective Action Result
F0003 Main supply failed Ensure the following: OFF2
Undervoltage Shock load outside specified limits S Supply voltage (P0210) must lie
within limits indicated on rating plate
S Supply must not be susceptible to
temporary failures or voltage
reductions
F0004 Ventilation inadequate Ensure the following: OFF2
Inverter
overtemperature
Ambient temperature is too high S Fan must turn when inverter is
running
S Pulse frequency must be set to
default value
S Ambient temperature must not be
higher than that specified for the
inverter:
P949 = 1: Rectifier overtemperature
P949 = 2: Ambient overtemperature
P949 = 3: EBOX overtemperature
F0005 Inverter overloaded Ensure the following: OFF2
Inverter I2T Duty cycle too demanding S Load duty cycle must lie within
Motor power (P0307) exceeds inverter specified limits
power capability (r0206)
S Motor power (P0307) must match
inverter power (r0206)
F0011 Motor overloaded Ensure the following: OFF1
Motor
overtemperature S Load duty cycle must be correct
S Motor nominal overtemperatures
(P0626−P0628) must be correct
S Motor temperature warning level
(P0604) must match
F0012 Wire breakage of inverter temperature OFF2
Inverter (heatsink) sensor
temperature
signal lost
F0015 Open or short circuit of motor OFF2
Motor temperature sensor
temperature If signal loss is detected, temperature
signal lost monitoring switches to monitoring with
the motor thermal model.
F0020 Occurs if one of the three input phases Check the input wiring of the main OFF2
Main phase are missed, the pulses are enabled, phases.
missing and the drive is loaded
F0021 Occurs if the sum of the phase OFF2
Earth fault currents is higher than 5% of the
nominal inverter current
F0022 UCE failure was detected when P0947 Check the I/O board. Ensure it is fully OFF2
Power stack fault = 22 and P0949 =12, 13, or 14, pressed home.
depending on UCE
F0023 One phase of output is disconnected OFF2
Output fault
Continued...

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-14 Electrical System

Motor Control System Indicating a Fault or Alarm (contd)


Table 7-4 Troubleshooting Motor Control System Faults (contd)
Fault Code Possible Cause Corrective Action Result
F0024 Ventilation inadequate Ensure the following: OFF2
Rectifier
overtemperature
Fan inoperative S Fan must turn when inverter is
Ambient temperature too high running
S Pulse frequency must be set to
default value
S Ambient temperature must not be
higher than that specified for the
inverter
F0030 Fan no longer working Replace the fan. OFF2
Fan has failed NOTE: This fault cannot be masked when
options module (AOP or BOP) is
connected.
F0035 Auto restart fault after n-restart try OFF2
Auto restart after
n
F0040 OFF2
Automatic
calibration failure
F0041 Motor data identification failed Ensure that the motor is connected to the OFF2
Motor data Alarm value =0: inverter.
identification Load missing Ensure that the motor data in P304−311
failure are correct.
Alarm value =1:
Current limit level reached during Check the type of motor wiring required
identification (star, delta).
Alarm value =2:
Identified stator resistance less than
0.1% or greater than 100%
Alarm value =3:
Identified rotor resistance less than
0.1% or greater than 100%
Alarm value =4:
Identified stator reactance less than
50% and greater than 500%
Alarm value =5:
Identified main reactance less than
50% and greater than 500%
Alarm value =6:
Identified rotor time constant less than
10 ms or greater than 5 s
Alarm value =7:
Identified total leakage reactance less
than 5% and greater than 50%
Alarm value =8:
Identified stator leakage reactance
less than 25% and greater than 250%
Alarm value =9:
Identified rotor leakage inductance
less than 25% and greater than 250%
Continued...

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-15

Table 7-4 Troubleshooting Motor Control System Faults (contd)


Fault Code Possible Cause Corrective Action Result
Alarm value = 20:
Identified IGBT on-voltage less than
0.5 or greater than 10 V
Alarm value = 30:
Current controller at voltage limit
Alarm value = 40:
Inconsistency in identified data set; at
least one identification failed
NOTE: Percentage values are based
on the impedance Zb =
Vmot,nom/sqrt(3)/Imot,nom.
F0042 Motor data identification failed OFF2
Speed control Alarm value =0:
optimization Timeout waiting for stable speed
failure
Alarm value =1:
Inconsistent readings
F0051 Read or write failure while saving Perform factory reset and new OFF2
Parameter nonvolatile parameter parameterization.
EEPROM fault Replace the drive.
F0052 Read failure for power stack Replace the drive. OFF2
Power stack fault information or invalid data
F0053 Read failure for I/O EEPROM 1. Check the data. OFF2
I/O EEPROM fault information or invalid data
2. Replace the I/O module.
F0054 Wrong I/O board connected 1. Check the data. OFF2
Wrong I/O board No ID detected on I/O board; no data 2. Replace the I/O module.
F0060 Internal communications failure 1. If the fault persists, replace the OFF2
Asic timeout inverter.
2. Contact Service Department
F0070 No setpoint values from CB Check the CB and communication OFF2
CB setpoint fault (communication board) during partner.
telegram off time
F0071 No setpoint values from USS during Check the USS master. OFF2
USS (BOP-link) telegram off time
setpoint fault
F0072 No setpoint values from USS during Check the USS master. OFF2
USS (COMM link) telegram off time
setpoint fault
F0080 Broken wire OFF2
ADC lost input Signal out of limits
signal
F0085 External fault triggered via terminal Disable the terminal input for the fault OFF2
External fault inputs trigger.
Continued...

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-16 Electrical System

Motor Control System Indicating a Fault or Alarm (contd)


Table 7-4 Troubleshooting Motor Control System Faults (contd)
Fault Code Possible Cause Corrective Action Result
F0090 Signal from encoder lost 1. Check that the encoder is fitted. If it is OFF2
Encoder feedback not, set P400 = 0 and select SLVC
loss mode (P1300 = 20 or 22).
2. Check the connections between the
encoder and the inverter.
3. Ensure that the encoder is not faulty
(select P1300 = 0, run at fixed speed,
and check the encoder feedback
signal in P66).
4. Increase the encoder loss threshold
in P492.
F0101 Software error or processor failure Run self-test routines. OFF2
Stack overflow
F0221 PID feedback below minimum value Change the value of P2268. Adjust the OFF2
PID feedback (P2268) feedback gain.
below minimum
value
F0222 PID feedback above maximum value Change the value of P2267. Adjust the OFF2
PID feedback (P2267) feedback gain.
above maximum
value
F0450 Fault value: Replace the drive. OFF2
BIST tests failure 1 = Some power section tests have NOTE: The drive may run, but some
failed features will not work properly.
2 = Some control board tests have
failed
4 = Some functional tests have failed
16 = Internal RAM failed on power-up
check
Continued...

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-17

Table 7-4 Troubleshooting Motor Control System Faults (contd)


Fault Code Possible Cause Corrective Action Result
F0452 Load conditions on motor indicate belt Ensure the following: OFF2
Belt failure failure or mechanical fault
detected S No breakage, seizure, or obstruction
of drive train
S If using an external speed sensor,
check for correct function. Check
parameters:
P0409 (pulse per min. at rated speed)
P2191 (belt failure speed tolerance)
P2192 (delay time for permitted
deviation)
S If using the torque envelope, check
parameters:
P2182 (threshold frequency f1)
P2183 (threshold frequency f2)
P2184 (threshold frequency f3)
P2185 (upper torque threshold 1)
P2186 (lower torque threshold 1)
P2187 (upper torque threshold 2)
P2188 (lower torque threshold 2)
P2189 (upper torque threshold 3
P2190 (lower torque threshold 3)
P2192 (delay time for permitted
deviation)
Apply lubrication if required.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-18 Electrical System

Motor Control System Indicating a Fault or Alarm (contd)

Table 7-5 Troubleshooting Motor Control System Alarms


Alarm Code Possible Cause Corrective Action
A0501 Motor power does not correspond to Ensure the following:
Current limit inverter power
S Motor power (P0307) must
Motor leads are too long correspond to inverter power (r0206)
Earth faults
S Cable length limits must not be
exceeded
S Motor cable and motor must have no
short circuits or earth faults
S Motor parameters must match the
motor in use
S Value of stator resistance (P0350)
must be correct
S Motor must not be obstructed or
overloaded. Increase the ramp-up
time or reduce the boost.
A0502 Overvoltage limit reached If this warning is displayed permanently,
Overvoltage limit This warning can occur during check the drive input voltage.
ramp-down if the DC-link controller is
disabled (P1240 = 0).
A0503 Main supply failed Check the main supply voltage (P0210).
Undervoltage limit Main supply (P0210) and
consequently DC-link voltage (R0026)
below specified limit (P2172)
A0504 Warning level of inverter heat sink Ensure the following:
Inverter overtemperature temperature (P0614) exceeded,
resulting in pulse frequency reduction S Ambient temperature must lie within
and/or output frequency reduction specified limits
(depending on parameterization in S Load conditions and duty cycle must
(P0610) be appropriate
A0505 Warning level exceeded; current will Ensure that the duty cycle lies within
Inverter I2T be reduced if parameterized specified limits.
(P0610 = 1)
A0506 Difference between heat sink and Ensure that the duty cycle and shock
Inverter duty cycle IGBT junction temperature exceeds loads lie within specified limits.
warning limits
Continued...

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-19

Table 7-5 Troubleshooting Motor Control System Alarms (contd)


Alarm Code Possible Cause Corrective Action
A0511 Motor overloaded 5. Independently of the kind of
Motor overtemperature I2T Load duty cycle too high temperature determination, check:
S P0604 motor temperature
warning threshold
S P0625 motor ambient
temperature
6. If P601 = 0 or 1:
S Check if name plate data are
correct (if not perform quick
commissioning). Accurate
equivalent circuit data can be
found by performing motor
identification (P1910=1).
S Check that motor weight (P344)
is reasonable. Change if
necessary.
S Via P626, P627, and P628, the
standard overtemperatures can
be changed if the motor is not a
Siemens standard motor.
7. If P601 = 2:
S Check that temperature shown in
r35 is reasonable.
S Check that the sensor is a KTY84
(other sensors are not
supported).
A0512 Wire break to motor temperature
Motor temperature signal lost sensor
NOTE: If a wire breakage is detected,
temperature monitoring switches to
monitoring with the motor thermal
model.
A0520 Warning level of rectifier heat sink Ensure the following:
Rectifier overtemperature temperature (P) exceeded
S Ambient temperature must lie within
specified limits
S Load conditions and duty cycle must
be appropriate
S Fan must turn when drive is running
A0521 Warning level of ambient temperature Ensure the following:
Ambient overtemperature (P) exceeded
S Ambient temperature must lie within
specified limits
S Fan must turn when drive is running
S Fan intake air must not meet any
resistance
A0522 Cyclic access to UCE values and
I2C read out timeout power stack temperatures via i2c bus
disturbed
Continued...

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-20 Electrical System

Motor Control System Indicating a Fault or Alarm (contd)


Table 7-5 Troubleshooting Motor Control System Alarms (contd)
Alarm Code Possible Cause Corrective Action
A0523 One phase of output disconnected
Output fault NOTE: This warning can be masked.
A0535
Braking resistor hot
A0541 Motor data identification (P1910)
Motor data identification active selected or running
A0542 Speed control optimization (P1960)
Speed control optimization selected or running
active
A0590 Signal from encoder lost and inverter Stop the inverter and then:
Encoder feedback loss has switched to sensorless vector
1. Check that the encoder is fitted. If it is
warning control
not, set P400 = 0 and select SLVC
mode (P1300 = 20 or 22).
2. Check the connections between the
encoder and the inverter.
3. Ensure that the encoder is not faulty
(select P1300 = 0, run at fixed speed,
and check the encoder feedback
signal in P66).
4. Increase the encoder loss threshold
in P492.
A0600
RTOS overrun warning
A0700 CB (communication board)-specific Refer to the CB manual.
CB warning 1 (see CB manual
for details)
A0701 CB (communication board)-specific Refer to the CB manual.
CB warning 2 (see CB manual
for details)
A0702 CB (communication board)-specific Refer to the CB manual.
CB warning 3 (see CB manual
for details)
A0703 CB (communication board)-specific Refer to the CB manual.
CB warning 4 (see CB manual
for details)
A0704 CB (communication board)-specific Refer to the CB manual.
CB warning 5 (see CB manual
for details)
A0705 CB (communication board)-specific Refer to the CB manual.
CB warning 6 (see CB manual
for details)
A0706 CB (communication board)-specific Refer to the CB manual.
CB warning 7 (see CB manual
for details)
A0707 CB (communication board)-specific Refer to the CB manual.
CB warning 8 (see CB manual
for details)
A0708 CB (communication board)-specific Refer to the CB manual.
CB warning 9 (see CB manual
for details)
Continued...

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-21

Table 7-5 Troubleshooting Motor Control System Alarms (contd)


Alarm Code Possible Cause Corrective Action
A0709 CB (communication board)-specific Refer to the CB manual.
CB warning 10 (see CB
manual for details)
A0710 Communication with CB Check the CB hardware.
CB communication error (communication board) lost
A0711 CB (communication board) has Check the CB parameters.
CB configuration error reported configuration error
A0910 VDC-maximum controller has been Ensure the following:
VDC-maximum controller deactivated because controller is not
deactivated capable of keeping DC-link voltage S Input voltage (P0210) must lie within
(r0026) within limits (P2172) range
Occurs if main supply voltage (P0210) S Load must be matched
is permanently too high
Occurs if motor is driven by an active
load, causing the motor to operate in
the regenerative mode
Occurs at very high load inertias when
ramping down
A0911 VDC-maximum controller is active, so
VDC-maximum controller ramp-down times will be increased
active automatically to keep DC-link voltage
(r0026) within limits (P2172)
A0912 VDC-minimum controller will be
VDC-minimum controller activated if DC-link voltage (r0026)
active falls below minimum level (P2172)
NOTE: The kinetic energy of the motor
is used to buffer the DC-link voltage,
thus causing deceleration of the drive!
Therefore, short mains failures do not
necessarily lead to an undervoltage
trip.
A0920 ADC parameters should not be set to
ADC parameters not set identical values. This would produce
properly illogical results.
Index 0: Parameter settings for output
identical
Index 1: Parameter settings for input
identical
Index 2: Parameter settings for input
do not correspond to ADC type
A0921 DAC parameters should not be set to
DAC parameters not set identical values. This would produce
properly illogical results.
Index 0: Parameter settings for output
identical
Index 1: Parameter settings for input
identical
Index 2: Parameter settings for output
do not correspond to DAC type

Continued...

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-22 Electrical System

Motor Control System Indicating a Fault or Alarm (contd)


Table 7-5 Troubleshooting Motor Control System Alarms (contd)
Alarm Code Possible Cause Corrective Action
A0922 No load applied to the inverter. As a
No load applied to inverter result, some functions may not work
as they would under normal load
conditions.

A0923 Both JOG left and JOG right


Both JOG left and JOG right (P1055/P1056) requested. This
are requested freezes the RFG output frequency at
its current value.
A0952 Load conditions on motor indicate belt Ensure the following:
Belt failure detected failure or mechanical fault
S No breakage, seizure or obstruction
of drive train
S If using an external speed sensor,
check for correct function. Check
parameters:
P0409 (pulse per min. at rated speed)
P2191 (Belt failure speed tolerance).
P2192 (delay time for permitted
deviation)
S If using the torque envelope, check
parameters:
P2182 (threshold frequency f1)
P2183 (threshold frequency f2)
P2184 (threshold frequency f3)
P2185 (upper torque threshold 1)
P2186 (lower torque threshold 1)
P2187 (upper torque threshold 2)
P2188 (lower torque threshold 2)
P2189 (upper torque threshold 3)
P2190 (lower torque threshold 3)
P2192 (delay time for permitted
deviation)
Apply lubrication if required.
A0936 PID auto-tuning (P2350) selected or
PID auto-tuning active running

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-23

Troubleshooting Procedures
Use these procedures as directed in Troubleshooting Tables to further
troubleshoot control system problems.

Checking the Vista POWER Switch


Follow this procedure to check the POWER switch on the Vista control
panel.

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury, or death. This


procedure requires you to perform electrical troubleshooting with the power
on. Use extreme caution and refer to Electrical Safety During
Troubleshooting before performing this procedure.

1. Place the melter main disconnect switch in the ON position.


2. Loosen the screws that secure the Vista control assembly to the melter
and then carefully lower the assembly.
3. With the Vista POWER switch in the OFF position, measure the voltage
across J4 positions 1 and 4 on the Vista power board:
S Voltage does not measure 230 VAC: replace the POWER switch and
harness.
S Voltage measures 230 VAC: normal indication. Continue to the next
step.
4. With the Vista POWER switch in the ON position, measure the voltage
across J4 positions 2 and 5 on the Vista power board:
S Voltage does not measure 230 VAC: replace the POWER switch and
harness.
S Voltage measures 230 VAC: normal indication. Return to the
appropriate troubleshooting table.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-24 Electrical System

Checking the Voltage Plug on the Vista Power Board


Follow this procedure to ensure that the voltage plug is connected and/or to
ensure that the correct voltage plug is installed. To make this check, you will
need to know the melter voltage (240 VAC or 400 VAC).

1. Place the melter main disconnect switch in the OFF position.


2. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the melter.
3. Loosen the screws that secure the Vista control assembly to the melter
and then carefully lower the assembly.
4. See Figure 7-5. Ensure that the voltage plug at X3 on the Vista power
board is connected.
5. Ensure that the melter has the correct voltage plug. The voltage plug
part number is stamped on the side of the plug. Refer to Table 7-6.

Table 7-6 Voltage Plug Part Numbers


Melter Voltage Voltage Plug Part Number
240 VAC 227568
400 VAC 227569

X3
610400021

Figure 7-5 Location of the voltage plug on the Vista power board

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-25

Troubleshooting Undertemperature Conditions


WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury, or death. Some
troubleshooting procedures require you to perform work inside the electrical
enclosure with the power on. Follow electrical safety procedures and
observe all high-voltage indicators. Refer to Electrical Safety During
Troubleshooting and before performing any troubleshooting procedure.

1. Press the CLEAR FAULTS key on the Vista control panel and wait for
the system to return to the system-ready state.
2. If the warning disappears and the melter appears to be working again,
the voltage to the melter may have temporarily sagged or you may have
an intermittent problem. Repeated undertemperature warnings in the
same zone indicate a problem with the circuitry in that zone or an
intermittent RTD failure. Perform the following actions to troubleshoot
intermittent undertemperature warnings:
a. Check for a change in environmental conditions, such as added
ventilation or sources of drafts. A cold draft can keep the melter,
hoses, and applicators from reaching application temperature.
b. Ensure that the power is turned on at the branch circuit disconnect
switch and that the power supply is supplying the proper voltage to
the melter.
c. Check all hose and applicator cordset connections. Ensure that the
connections are tight and free of corrosion.
d. Check your operating temperature setpoints to ensure that they have
not been changed.
e. If the problem zone is a hose or applicator zone, replace the suspect
hose or applicator with a hose or applicator that is known to be good.
If the intermittent warning problem disappears, replace the suspect
hose or applicator.
3. If the intermittent undertemperature warning problem continues after you
have pressed the CLEAR FAULTS key and after you have performed
the actions in step 2, perform the following actions:
a. Check for loose heater connections on the device that supplies the
heater power for the problem zone. Refer to Table 7-7.
b. Check the fuses on the Vista power board. See Figure 7-6 for fuse
locations. Replace the appropriate fuse or fuses. If the fuse blows
again, ensure that the heater is not shorted to the ground.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-26 Electrical System

Troubleshooting Undertemperature Conditions (contd)


c. If the problem zone is a tank, reservoir, or grid, ensure that the
harness connected to J2 on the power board is secure or check the
thermostat. See Figure 7-3 for the location of J2 on the power board.
To check a thermostat, refer to Checking a Thermostat later in this
section.
d. Check the K1 contactor on the power board. While pressing the
HEATERS key on the Vista control panel on and off, listen for the K1
contactor to engage. You can also open the melter and visually
examine the contactor to see if it engages. See Figure 7-3 for the
location of K1 on the power board. If K1 is not engaging, replace the
power board. Refer to Replacing the Vista Control Assembly or an
Assembly Board in the Repair Procedures part of this section.
e. Check the heater or heater circuit of the problem zone. Refer to
Checking a Heater or Heater Circuit later in this section.
f. If the intermittent undertemperature warning problem continues after
you have taken all the actions in this procedure, replace the control
assembly. Refer to Replacing the Vista Control Assembly or an
Assembly Board in the Repair Procedures part of this section.

F1
F2

F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F11 F12
F10
610402003

Figure 7-6 Location of fuses on the Vista power board

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-27

Troubleshooting Overtemperature Conditions


Follow this procedure to troubleshoot overtemperature faults.

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury, or death. Some


troubleshooting procedures require you to perform work inside the electrical
enclosure with the power on. Follow electrical safety procedures and
observe all high-voltage indicators. Refer to Electrical Safety During
Troubleshooting before performing any troubleshooting procedure.

1. Press the CLEAR FAULTS key on the Vista control panel.


2. If the fault disappears and the melter appears to be working again, you
may have an intermittent problem. Repeated faults in the same zone
indicate a problem with the circuitry in that zone or an intermittent RTD
failure. Electrical noise from DC drive motors on other equipment may
cause the Vista power board triacs that control heater power to close
independent of the control system. Take the following steps to
troubleshoot intermittent overtemperature faults:
a. Check your operating temperature setpoints to ensure that they have
not been changed.
b. To verify that something other than the control system is affecting a
heated zone, turn on the display heater proportioning feature
(Feature 21) for the problem zone. When the display blinks on and
off, it means the control system is proportioning heat control to the
heater. During proportioning, the temperature displayed for the zone
should stay fairly constant, within ±1 °F. If the temperature continues
to rise during proportioning, then something other than the control
system is closing the triacs on the power board and causing the
heaters to heat. If electrical noise from DC drives on other
equipment is causing the overheating problem, then you may be
experiencing problems with other equipment in your facility. Perform
the following actions to solve electrical noise problems:
S Install the proper line reactor. Consult with the DC drive
manufacturer for the appropriate line reactor size.
S Electrically ground the melter to the parent machine using as
short a length of twisted cable as possible.
c. If the problem zone is a hose or applicator, replace the suspect hose
or applicator with a hose or applicator that is known to be good. If
the intermittent fault problem disappears, replace the suspect hose
or applicator.
3. If the intermittent overtemperature fault problem continues after you
have pressed the CLEAR FAULTS key and after you have performed
actions in step 2, check the heater or heater circuit of the problem zone.
Refer to Checking a Heater or Heater Circuit later in this section.
4. If the intermittent overtemperature fault problem continues after you
have taken all the actions in this procedure, replace the control
assembly. Refer to Replacing the Vista Control Assembly or an
Assembly Board in the Repair Procedures part of this section.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-28 Electrical System

Checking a Thermostat
Follow this procedure to check a thermostat.

1. Relieve system pressure. Refer to Relieving System Pressure in


Section 6, Maintenance.
2. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the melter.
3. Access the thermostat. See Figure 7-14 for the location of the melter
thermostats. Refer to the applicator manual for the location of an
applicator thermostat. This procedure cannot be used to check a hose
thermostat.
4. Connect an ohmmeter set on the lowest resistance scale across the
thermostat; then heat the thermostat with a flameless electric heat gun:
S Short circuit before thermostat reaches temperature and open circuit
when thermostat reaches temperature: normal indication. Return to
the appropriate troubleshooting table.
S Short circuit or low resistance at high temperature: defective
thermostat. Replace the thermostat. To replace a melter thermostat,
refer to Replacing an RTD or Thermostat in the Repair Procedures
part of this section. To replace an applicator thermostat, refer to the
applicator manual.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-29

Checking a Heater or Heater Circuit


Follow this procedure to check a heater or heater circuit.

1. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the melter.


2. Loosen the screws that secure the Vista control assembly to the melter
and then carefully lower the assembly.
3. Refer to Table 7-7. Check the heater by measuring its resistance at the
heater connector pins:
S Resistance reading of zero (0): heater short circuit. Check for a short
in the heater circuit and repair the short.
S Infinite resistance reading: open heater circuit or heater. Go to the
next step.

Table 7-7 Heater Connector Locations and Pins for Measuring Resistance
Problem Zone Connector Location Connector: Pin Resistance Range
Hose 1 Vista power board X1: 1 and X2: 1 1400−50 ohms
Hose 2 Vista power board X1: 3 and X2: 3 1400−50 ohms
Hose 3 Vista power board X1: 5 and X2: 5 1400−50 ohms
Hose 4 Vista power board X1: 7 and X2: 7 1400−50 ohms
Applicator 1 Vista power board X1: 2 and X2: 2 600−100 ohms
Applicator 2 Vista power board X1: 4 and X2: 4 600−100 ohms
Applicator 3 Vista power board X1: 6 and X2: 6 600−100 ohms
Applicator 4 Vista power board X1: 8 and X2: 8 600−100 ohms
Tank/reservoir Vista power board XL1 and XL2 17−30 ohms

4. Check the continuity of the heater circuit by measuring the heater


resistance at a point in the circuit that is closer to the heater:
S If the problem zone is a hose or applicator, measure the heater
resistance at the hose or applicator cordset connector. Refer to the
wiring diagrams in Section 12, Technical Data, as needed. If you
measure infinite or zero (0) resistance, replace the applicator heater
or the entire hose. To replace an applicator heater, refer to the
applicator manual. To replace a hose, refer to Hose Replacement in
Section 10, Hoses.
S If the problem zone is the tank/reservoir, measure the resistance at
the tank/reservoir heater connectors. If you measure infinite or
zero (0) resistance, replace the tank/reservoir.
5. If you do not find a continuity problem, replace the control board or the
control assembly. Refer to Replacing the Vista Control Assembly or an
Assembly Board in the Repair Procedures part of this section.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-30 Electrical System

Checking an RTD or RTD Circuit


Follow this procedure to check an RTD or RTD circuit.

NOTE: If the problem zone is a hose or an applicator, you can remove the
suspect hose or applicator and replace it with a hose or applicator that is
known to be good. If the fault disappears, then the problem is in the hose or
applicator, not inside the melter. Refer to the applicator manual for
instructions on checking and replacing the applicator RTD.
1. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the melter.
2. Access the RTD. See Figure 7-14 for the location of the melter RTDs.
Refer to the applicator manual for the location of the applicator RTD.
3. Check the RTD by measuring its resistance. Refer to Table 7-8.
S If the RTD is defective, replace the RTD. If a hose RTD is defective,
you must replace the hose. To replace a hose, refer to Hose
Replacement in Section 10, Hoses. To replace an applicator RTD,
refer to the applicator manual. To replace a melter RTD, refer to
Replacing an RTD or Thermostat in the Repair Procedures part of
this section.
NOTE: Flex the hose when you are checking a hose RTD. Some hose
RTDs exhibit problems intermittently.

S If the RTD is good, go to the next step.

Table 7-8 Methods for Measuring RTD Resistance


Quick Methods In-Depth Methods
Using a surface-temperature sensing device, such as Let the system cool down to room temperature.
a thermocouple, measure the temperature of the RTD When the RTD has had time to reach room
at or near the end of the RTD that is accessible. Then temperature, use an ohmmeter to measure its
use an ohmmeter to measure its resistance (see resistance (see Note A). See Figure 7-7 and
Note A). See Figure 7-7 and compare the resistance compare the resistance reading to the RTD’s
reading to the RTD’s normal resistance at the known normal resistance at room temperature.
temperature.
Roughly estimate the temperature of the RTD to the Remove the RTD and heat it to a known
nearest 50 _C (100 _F). Use an ohmmeter to temperature by using an oven or by placing it in
measure its resistance (see Note A). See Figure 7-7 boiling water (protect the wires and hold them
and compare the resistance reading to the RTD’s above the water). Then use an ohmmeter to
normal resistance at the estimated temperature. measure its resistance (see Note A). See
Because RTDs usually fail open or closed, any Figure 7-7 and compare the resistance reading
resistance reading from approximately 100−400 ohms to the RTD’s normal resistance at the known
strongly indicates that the RTD is good. temperature.
NOTE A: If the problem zone is a hose or applicator, measure the RTD resistance at the hose or
applicator cordset connector. Refer to the wiring diagrams in Section 12, Technical Data, as
needed. Because the core elements of a hose are not accessible, you cannot use some of the
methods described in this table to measure the resistance of a hose RTD. If the problem zone
is the tank/reservoir, measure the RTD resistance at pins 33 and 34 of the harness attached
to connector XP2 on the control board.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-31

4. Check the continuity of the RTD circuit by measuring the RTD resistance
at other points in the circuit. Refer to Table 7-9 for the cordset connector
or harness pins for each check. For an applicator RTD, you can check
continuity at the applicator cordset connector or at the harness
connected to XP2 on the control board. For a hose RTD, you can check
continuity at the hose cordset connector or at the harness connected to
XP2 on the control board. See Figure 7-3 for the location of XP2 on the
control board. For a tank/reservoir RTD, there are no further checks you
can make: go to the next step.

Table 7-9 Pins for Checking RTD Resistance


Zone with Applicator Cordset Hose Cordset Connector XP2
Problem RTD Connector Pins Connector Pins Harness Pins
Applicator 1 3 and 5 3 and 5 9 and 10
Hose 1 N/A 5 and 8 1 and 2
Applicator 2 3 and 5 3 and 5 11 and 12
Hose 2 N/A 5 and 8 3 and 4
Applicator 3 3 and 5 3 and 5 13 and 14
Hose 3 N/A 5 and 8 5 and 6
Applicator 4 3 and 5 3 and 5 15 and 16
Hose 4 N/A 5 and 8 7 and 8
Tank/reservoir N/A N/A 33 and 34

5. If you find a continuity problem in the applicator RTD circuit, replace the
hose or replace the applicator RTD harness inside the melter as
appropriate. If you find a continuity problem in the hose RTD circuit,
replace the hose RTD harness inside the melter. If you do not find a
continuity problem, go to the next step.
6. Replace the control board or the control assembly. Refer to Replacing
the Vista Control Assembly or an Assembly Board in the Repair
Procedures part of this section.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-32 Electrical System

Checking an RTD or RTD Circuit (contd)

360

340

320

300

280
RESISTANCE IN OHMS

260

240

220

200

180

160

140

120

10_C 32_C 54_C 77_C 99_C 121_C 143_C 166_C 188_C 210_C 232_C
(50 _F ) (90 _F ) (130_F ) (170_F ) (210_F ) (250_F ) (290_F ) (330_F ) (370_F ) (410_F ) (450_F )
690504003W

Figure 7-7 RTD resistance vs. temperature

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-33

Repair Procedures
Troubleshooting activities may identify needed repairs. This part of
Section 7 contains procedures for repairs that require some special
knowledge. Procedures that can be easily performed without special
knowledge, such as replacing a replacing a harness or cable, are not
included.

Replacing the Vista Control Assembly or an Assembly Board


Follow these procedures to replace the entire Vista control assembly or to
replace just the power board, control board, or display board. You will need
the following items:
S tool kit, including a torque wrench
S labels for labeling electrical connections
S replacement board or control assembly

Preparation
1. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the melter.
2. Loosen the screws that secure the Vista control assembly to the melter
and then carefully lower the assembly.
3. Label or note all power board connections for later reference.
4. Disconnect all harnesses, ribbon cables, and other connections from the
control assembly.
5. Remove the screws at each corner of the power board; then remove the
control assembly. If you are replacing the entire control assembly, skip to
System Restoration.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-34 Electrical System

Power Board Removal


NOTE: Refer to Section 11, Parts, for an exploded drawing of the control
assembly parts.
1. If you have not already done so, complete Preparation.
2. See Figure 7-8. Disconnect the voltage plug from X3 on the power
board.
NOTE: Replacement power boards do not have a voltage plug. You
must keep the voltage plug from the old board.

X3
610400021

Figure 7-8 Location of the voltage plug on the Vista power board
3. Remove the mounting hardware from the power board.

CAUTION: Risk of equipment damage. Do not bend the XP1 connector


pins.

4. Starting from the edge opposite the XP1 connector, carefully separate
the power board from the control board. Take care not to bend the XP1
connector pins that join the power board and control board.
NOTE: The XP1 connector may remain attached to the power board. If
it does, remove it and attach it to connector XP3 on the control board.

5. To install a new power board, continue to the next procedure. To


continue disassembling the control assembly, go to Control Board
Removal.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-35

Power Board Installation


1. Remove the new board from its static-safe container. Handle the board
by its edges without touching any pins, wires, or circuitry.
2. See Figure 7-9. Align XP1 on the new power board with the connector
pins on the control board. Press the board into place, making sure the
connector pins are properly inserted into their sockets.

610400017

Figure 7-9 Aligning the XP1 connector pins


3. Install the mounting screws and lock washers you removed earlier. Be
sure to use lock washers on the three screws located at the three
ground pads on the power board. Tighten all screws to
1.0−1.4 NSm (10−12 in.-lb).
4. Install the large triac (Q17) screw, which is to the left of TB1. Tighten the
screw to 0.8−0.9 NSm (7−8 in.-lb).
5. Install the two triac clamps and, starting with the center screw, tighten
the securing screws to 1.0−1.4 NSm (10−12 in.-lb).
6. See Figure 7-8. Connect the voltage plug you kept from the old board to
X3 on the new power board.
7. Go to System Restoration.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-36 Electrical System

Control Board Removal


NOTE: Refer to Section 11, Parts, for an exploded drawing of the control
assembly parts.
1. If you have not already done so, complete Preparation and Power Board
Removal.
2. Label or note all control board connections for later reference.
3. Disconnect all harnesses, ribbon cables, and other connections from the
control board.
4. Remove the mounting hardware from the control board.
5. Carefully separate the control board from the display board. Take care
not to bend the XP4A connector pins that join the control and display
boards. Retain the connector.

Control Board Installation


1. Remove the new board from its static-safe container. Handle the board
by its edges without touching any pins, wires, or circuitry.
2. See Figure 7-10. Align the XP4A connector pins (2) with the
connector (1) on the display board, then carefully press the control
board into place.

1
1

2
610400018

Figure 7-10 Aligning the XP4A connector


1. XP4A connecter 2. XP4A connector pins

3. Reinstall the mounting hardware. Be sure to use lock washers on the


two screws located at the two ground pads on the control board. Tighten
all screws to 1.0−1.4 NSm (10−12 in.-lb).
4. Connect all other harnesses, ribbon cables, and other connections to
the control board.
5. To reinstall the power board and restore the system to normal operation,
go to step 2 in Power Board Installation earlier in this section. To
continue disassembling the control assembly, go to Display Board
Removal.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-37

Display Board Removal


NOTE: Refer to Section 11, Parts, for an exploded drawing of the control
assembly parts.
1. If you have not already done so, complete Preparation and Control
Board Removal.
2. Remove the mounting hardware that secures the display board to the
control assembly frame and remove the display board.

Display Board Installation


1. Remove the new board from its static-safe container. Handle the board
by its edges without touching any pins, wires, or circuitry.
2. Align the display board with the control assembly frame and attach it
with the mounting hardware. Tighten all screws to
1.0−1.4 NSm (10−12 in.-lb).
3. Install the control board and power board and then continue to the next
procedure, System Restoration. Refer to Control Board Installation and
Power Board Installation earlier in this section as needed.

System Restoration
1. Reconnect all harnesses, ribbon cables, and other disconnected
components to the power board on the new or repaired control
assembly.
2. Reinstall the melter covers.
3. If you replaced the control board or the entire control assembly, re-enter
your customized system settings, if any. Refer to Programming Vista
Control System Settings and Record of Vista Control System Settings in
Section 4, Setup.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-38 Electrical System

Replacing the Vista Control Panel


Follow this procedure to replace the Vista control panel. As an alternative,
you can save time by replacing the entire control assembly (refer to
Replacing the Vista Control Assembly or an Assembly Board). You will need
the following items:
S tool kit
S rubber roller or similar tool
S citrus industrial cleaner
S denatured alcohol
S replacement control panel

Control Panel Removal


1. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the melter.
2. Loosen the screws that secure the Vista control assembly to the melter
and then carefully lower the assembly.
3. See Figure 7-11. Using a flat-blade screwdriver and pliers, pull the
control panel away from the control assembly frame and guide the
ribbon cable through the hole in the frame.
4. Use a citrus industrial cleaner to remove any adhesive that remains on
the control assembly frame; then use denatured alcohol to thoroughly
clean the residue left by the citrus industrial cleaner.

610400022

Figure 7-11 Removing the Vista control panel

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-39

Control Panel Installation


1. Remove the new control panel from its static-safe container. Handle the
panel by its edges without touching the ribbon cable pins.
2. With clean hands, peel the paper backing from the control panel. Be
sure to remove all the paper, especially around the ribbon cable.
3. See Figure 7-12. Connect the plastic ground tab located behind the
selector display to the new control panel by lifting the tab up and
pressing it against the adhesive backing.

610400023

Figure 7-12 Connecting the Vista control panel ground tab


4. Insert the ribbon cable through the hole in the control assembly frame
and, starting from the ribbon strip side of the control panel, carefully
align the control panel on the control assembly frame.

CAUTION: The control assembly surface must be clean and smooth.


Otherwise, the control panel may lose contact and cause poor unit
performance. Additional damage can occur if operators attempt to run the
unit using a panel that is not securely mounted.

5. Firmly press the control panel into place with a rubber roller or similar
tool.
6. Connect the ribbon cable.
7. Return the Vista control assembly to its upright position and secure it
with the captive screws.
8. Restore the system to normal operation.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-40 Electrical System

Replacing a Motor Control System Component


Follow this procedure to replace a motor drive or a motor control dial,
switch, or potentiometer. You will need the following items:
S tool kit
S replacement component
1. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the melter.
2. Remove the melter left-side and right-side covers.
3. Loosen the screws that secure the Vista control assembly to the melter
and then carefully lower the assembly.
4. Replace the defective component. See Figure 7-2 for the location of the
motor drive. See Figure 7-13 for the motor control components.
5. Return the Vista control assembly to its upright position and secure it
with the captive screws.
6. Reinstall the melter covers and restore the system to normal operation.

1 1

2 2

1 1
3 3
VL210 VL215

Figure 7-13 Motor control components


1. Switch 2. Potentiometer 3. Motor speed dial

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Electrical System 7-41

Replacing an RTD or Thermostat


Follow these procedures to replace an RTD or thermostat. You will need the
following items:
S tool kit
S replacement RTD or thermostat
S heat-conductive paste
S thermal paste

Remove the RTD or Thermostat


See Figure 7-14.

1. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the melter.


2. Remove the hydraulic cover and the left and right control cabinet covers.
3. Disconnect the RTD or thermostat plug.
4. Remove the RTD or thermostat.

RTD or Thermostat Installation


1. Install the new RTD or thermostat. Coat RTDs with heat-conductive
paste and coat thermostats with thermal paste.
2. Connect the RTD or thermostat plug.
3. Reinstall the melter covers and restore the system to normal operation.

2
1

2
VL210 VL215

Figure 7-14 Location of the RTD and thermostat on a VL210 tank (left) and a VL215 reservoir (right)
1. Thermostat 2. RTD

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


7-42 Electrical System

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hydraulic System 8-1

Section 8
Hydraulic System

WARNING: Allow only personnel with appropriate training and experience


to operate or service the equipment. The use of untrained or inexperienced
personnel to operate or service the equipment can result in injury, including
death, to themselves and others, and damage to the equipment.

Introduction
This section contains troubleshooting and repair procedures for the melter’s
hydraulic system. It is organized as follows:
S Hydraulic System Overview
S Troubleshooting Tables
S Manifold Blockage Check
S Repair Procedures
Troubleshooting of the hydraulic system begins when the flow of adhesive
from an applicator stops or diminishes unexpectedly. If you try all the
troubleshooting suggestions in this section and still need assistance solving
hydraulic system problems, contact your Nordson representative.

Before performing any troubleshooting or repair activities, review Section 1,


Safety.

The following sections of this manual contain additional information on the


hydraulic system:

S Section 4, Setup, includes procedures for flushing the system and


adjusting the circulation control valves.
S Section 5, Operation, includes the procedure for adding adhesive to
the melter.
S Section 6, Maintenance, includes the procedure for cleaning or
replacing a manifold filter screen and for cleaning the system.
S Section 10, Hoses, includes procedures for troubleshooting and
repairing hoses.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


8-2 Hydraulic System

Introduction (contd)

You will need a well-stocked tool kit and a sufficient inventory of spare parts
and supplies. Each repair procedure is preceded by a list of the items you
will need. Refer to Tools and Supplies in Section 6, Maintenance, for a list of
recommended tools and supplies. Refer to Section 11, Parts, for the part
numbers of all parts and supplies and for a comprehensive list of
recommended spare parts and supplies.

Hydraulic System Overview


The hydraulic system includes the tank or hopper/reservoir assembly, the
pumps, and the manifold along with all associated components. Figure 8-1
provides a schematic of the melter’s hydraulic system.

Adhesive is added to the melter at the tank or hopper. You can load the
adhesive into the tank or hopper manually through the lid, or you can use an
adhesive feed system, such as a drum unloader, to pump adhesive into the
tank or hopper.

Adhesive flows from the tank or hopper/reservoir to the inlet of one or two
single- or dual-stream metering gear pumps. The pumps deliver streams of
adhesive to the manifold. Each pump is driven by an AC gear motor.

Inside the manifold, each adhesive stream passes through a filter, which
removes any char or contaminants from the adhesive. The adhesive then
exits the manifold at up to four separate hose ports. The manifold includes
pressure relief valves, drain valves, and circulation control valves. The
pressure relief valves automatically open whenever the system pressure
exceeds 103 bar (1,500 psi), allowing adhesive to flow back into the tank.
The drain valves are used to drain adhesive from the manifold and to relieve
pressure in the system. The circulation control valves are used to adjust the
recirculation pressure in the system. Refer to Adjusting a Circulation Control
Valve in Section 4, Setup, for the procedure for adjusting a circulation
control valve.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hydraulic System 8-3

TEMP.
CONTROL ADHESIVE

TANK

PUMP PUMP
(STREAM 1) (STREAM 2)
MOTOR
CONTROL

GEAR
MOTOR

DRAIN FILTER FILTER DRAIN


VALVE
ÉÉÉÉ PRV PRV
ÉÉÉÉ VALVE

ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
CCV CCV

CCV=CIRCULATION CONTROL VALVE


PRV=PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE 411000012

Figure 8-1 Hydraulic System Schematic

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


8-4 Hydraulic System

Troubleshooting Tables
The troubleshooting tables in this section describe the kinds of hydraulic
system problems you may encounter and provide corrective actions for
handling those problems. When necessary, the tables refer to more detailed
troubleshooting procedures.

Refer to the appropriate troubleshooting table for the type of problem you
are experiencing:
S Adhesive Leaking Between a Hopper and Reservoir
S Adhesive Not Applying Properly
S Pump Not Working

Adhesive Leaking Between a Hopper and Reservoir

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action


Adhesive leaking Insufficient torque on screws Tighten the screws that secure the
between a hopper and hopper and reservoir to 7−8 NSm
reservoir (60−72 in.-lb).
Worn or damaged O-ring cordstock Replace the O-ring cordstock. Refer
to Replacing the Hopper O-Ring
(VL215 Melters) in the Repair
Procedures part of this section.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hydraulic System 8-5

Adhesive Not Applying Properly


Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action
1. Little or no adhesive Melter not at application Wait for the time delay (if used) to
output temperature expire and for the READY light on the
Vista control panel to turn on.
Adhesive level too low Keep the tank at least half full of
adhesive. Refer to Adding Adhesive
in Section 5, Operation.
Adhesive too cold Check the zone operating
temperature setpoints and adjust
them as necessary. Refer to
Programming Vista Control System
Settings in Section 4, Setup.
Clogged manifold filter Clean or replace the manifold filter
screen. Refer to Cleaning or
Replacing a Manifold Filter Screen in
Section 6, Maintenance.
Blockage in manifold Check for blockage. Refer to Manifold
Blockage Check later in this section.
Incorrect pump speed setting Change the pump speed.
Pump or motor not operating Refer to Pump Not Working later in
this section to troubleshoot pump
problems. Refer to the
troubleshooting table in Section 9,
Drive System, to troubleshoot motor
problems.
Pump replaced with pump rated for Check for the correct pump. Replace
different output the pump if necessary.
Clogged manifold filter Clean or replace the manifold filter
screen. Refer to Cleaning or
Replacing a Manifold Filter Screen in
Section 6, Maintenance.
Continued on next page

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


8-6 Hydraulic System

Adhesive Not Applying Properly (contd)

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action


1. LIttle or no adhesive Circulation control valve clogged or Clean, replace, or adjust the
output (contd.) not properly adjusted circulation control valve. Refer to
Cleaning or Replacing a Circulation
Control Valve in the Repair
Procedures part of this section or
refer to Adjusting a Circulation
Control Valve in Section 4, Setup.
Cold hose-to-unit or Insulate the joints.
hose-to-applicator joints
Applicators not operating properly Refer to the applicator manual to
troubleshoot applicator problems.
Charred or gelled adhesive in Clean the system. Refer to Cleaning
bottom of tank suffocating pump or the System in Section 6,
acting as insulator to prevent tank Maintenance.
heaters from efficiently melting
adhesive
2. Wavy beads Adhesive too cold Check the zone operating
temperature setpoints and adjust
them as necessary. Refer to
Programming Vista Control System
Settings in Section 4, Setup.
Ambient temperature below Protect the hot melt system from
freezing or applicators subject to freezing temperature conditions and
draft drafts.
Nozzles too far from product Position the applicators so the
nozzles are no more than 13 mm
(0.5 in.) from the product.
3. Excessive adhesive at Nozzles too far from product Position the applicators so the
beginning of bead nozzles are no more than 13 mm
(0.5 in.) from the product.
Applicator and hose temperatures Check the zone operating
not properly balanced (for temperature setpoints and adjust
example, hose temperature too low them as necessary. Refer to
and applicator temperature too Programming Vista Control System
high) Settings in Section 4, Setup.
Manifold filter partially clogged Clean or replace the manifold filter
screen. Refer to Cleaning or
Replacing a Manifold Filter Screen in
Section 6, Maintenance.
Continued on next page

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hydraulic System 8-7

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action


4. Adhesive stringing Nozzle too far from product Position the applicators so the
nozzles are no more than 13 mm
(0.5 in.) from the product.
Adhesive too viscous Increase the hose or applicator
temperature setpoints or change to a
compatible lower-viscosity adhesive.
Adhesive too cold Check the zone operating
temperature setpoints and adjust
them as necessary. Refer to
Programming Vista Control System
Settings in Section 4, Setup.
Adhesive old Do not exceed the recommended pot
life of the adhesive.
5. Bead lays on product Adhesive too cold Check the zone operating
in concentric circles temperature setpoints and adjust
them as necessary. Refer to
Programming Vista Control System
Settings in Section 4, Setup.
Adhesive too viscous Change to a compatible
lower-viscosity adhesive.
6. Adhesive bouncing or Nozzle orifice too small for Change to a nozzle with a larger
splashing from application, resulting in the need orifice and decrease hydraulic
product for too much hydraulic pressure pressure.
Adhesive too hot Check the zone operating
temperature setpoints and adjust
them as necessary. Refer to
Programming Vista Control System
Settings in Section 4, Setup.
Adhesive not viscous enough Change to a compatible
higher-viscosity adhesive.
Continued on next page

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


8-8 Hydraulic System

Adhesive Not Applying Properly (contd)

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action


7. Adhesive not Adhesive too cold Check the zone operating
penetrating product temperature setpoints and adjust
them as necessary. Refer to
Programming Vista Control System
Settings in Section 4, Setup.
Special coating on product Increase the zone temperature
setpoints slightly or change
adhesives.
Not enough adhesive being Change to a higher-flow nozzle,
applied increase the zone temperature
setpoints slightly, or increase
hydraulic pressure.
Adhesive too viscous Change to a compatible
lower-viscosity adhesive.
8. Applicator spitting Adhesive level too low (pump Keep the tank at least half full of
intermittently, causing ingesting air) adhesive. Refer to Adding Adhesive
erratic bead in Section 5, Operation.
placement
Because of product form (pellets, Change to a compatible
for example) and high viscosity, lower-viscosity adhesive or to an
adhesive bridging as it melts and adhesive form that is less likely to
air not migrating to surface before bridge, or raise the tank temperature
being ingested into pump setpoint to make the adhesive less
viscous.
Product wet Preheat the product.
9. Adhesive gelling Changing to an adhesive Clean the system. Refer to Cleaning
incompatible with the previous the System in Section 6,
adhesive without first cleaning the Maintenance.
system
Adhesive heated for too long Clean the system. Refer to Cleaning
the System in Section 6,
Maintenance. Do not exceed the
recommended adhesive pot life.
Adhesive overheated Clean the system. Refer to Cleaning
the System in Section 6,
Maintenance. Decrease the
temperature setpoints.
10. Adhesive drooling Applicators not shutting off Refer to the applicator manual to
from applicator properly troubleshoot applicator problems.
Continued on next page

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hydraulic System 8-9

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action


11. Good adhesive Adhesive not cooling fast enough Decrease hydraulic pressure to
transfer and decrease the bead size. Decrease
penetration, but the temperature setpoints slightly.
adhesive bond Reduce the line speed through the
separates compression section. Increase the
length of the compression section.
Cool the product. Use a stitched bead
pattern.
Adhesive open time too long Change to an adhesive with a shorter
open time.
Adhesive deposit shearing Check for twisting or other adverse
movement during the compression
section.
12. Poor adhesive Adhesive cooling too fast Increase the hydraulic pressure to
transfer and increase the bead size. Increase the
penetration on temperature setpoints slightly.
married product Decrease the distance between the
nozzles and the product. Decrease
the distance between bead
application and bead compression.
Heat the product. Use a higher-flow
nozzle. Avoid stitched bead patterns.
Protect the applicator or bead from
cold air.
13. Adhesive fuming or Adhesive in tank too hot Check the tank temperature setpoint
smoking and adjust it as necessary.
Unstable adhesive Keep the lid closed when the unit is
operating. Change to a more stable
adhesive.
14. Adhesive charring in Adhesive in tank too hot Check the tank temperature setpoint
tank and adjust it as necessary.
Adhesive level too low Keep the tank at least half full of
adhesive. Refer to Adding Adhesive
in Section 5, Operation.
Adhesive oxidizing in tank Keep the lid closed when the unit is
operating. Change to a more stable
adhesive.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


8-10 Hydraulic System

Pump Not Working


Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action
1. Adhesive leaking from Pump shaft packing worn Tighten the pump gland bolt. Refer to
pump shaft packing Tightening the Pump Gland Bolt in
Section 6, Maintenance.
2. Adhesive leaking Pump screws loose Tighten the pump screws. Refer to
around pump body Tightening the Pump Screws in
Section 6, Maintenance.
3. Pump output too low Pump worn Replace the pump. Refer to
Replacing a Pump in the Repair
Procedures part of this section.
4. Pump not turning Adhesive too cold Wait for the time delay (if used) to
expire and for the READY light on the
Vista control panel to turn on.
Blockage at pump intake or foreign Disassemble the pump, remove the
object lodged in pump gears obstruction, then replace pump
components as necessary. Contact
your Nordson representative as
needed for assistance in rebuilding a
pump. You may also replace the
entire pump. Refer to Replacing a
Pump in the Repair Procedures part
of this section.
Blockage in manifold, manifold Refer to Manifold Blockage Check
filter clogged, pressure relief valve later in this section.
open, or circulation control valve
sticking
Problem with drive system (motor Refer to the troubleshooting table in
or coupling) Section 9, Drive System, to
troubleshoot motor problems.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hydraulic System 8-11

Manifold Blockage Check


Use this procedure as directed in the troubleshooting tables to further
troubleshoot hydraulic system problems.

1. Stop the pump and place the system in the manual mode.
2. Place a drain pan under a manifold drain valve open the valve.
3. Start the pump:
S Adhesive does not flow from the drain valve: there is no blockage in
the manifold and the problem is in the pump. Close the drain valve
and return to the Pump Not Working troubleshooting table.
S Adhesive flows from drain valve: the manifold may be blocked, the
pump O-ring may be damaged, or the pump may be worn. Continue
to the next step.
4. Stop the pump, remove the manifold filter, and inspect the filter screen.
Clean or replace the filter screen if necessary. Refer to Cleaning or
Replacing a Manifold Filter Screen in Section 6, Maintenance. Reinstall
the filter.
5. Disconnect hose 1 from the manifold hose port. Close the manifold drain
valve and start the pump. If adhesive flows from the hose port there is
no blockage in the manifold. Continue to the next step.
6. Remove the pump and check the pump O-rings. Replace them if they
are cracked or damaged. Refer to Replacing a Pump in the Repair
Procedures part of this section as needed.
7. Reinstall the pump, reconnect the hose, start the pump, and verify that
the pressure to the applicators is sufficient. If the pressure to the
applicators is insufficient, replace the pressure relief valves and/or clean
or replace the circulation control valves. Refer to Replacing a Pressure
Relief Valve or Cleaning or Replacing a Circulation Control Valve in the
Repair Procedures part of this section.
8. If the pump still does not work, replace the pump. Refer to Replacing a
Pump in the Repair Procedures part of this section.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


8-12 Hydraulic System

Repair Procedures
Troubleshooting activities may identify needed repairs. This part of
Section 8 contains procedures for repairs that require some special
knowledge. Procedures that can be easily performed without special
knowledge, such as replacing a drain valve, are not included.

NOTE: For maintenance procedures, such as manifold filter screen


cleaning, refer to Section 6, Maintenance.

Preparing for Repairs


Follow this procedure before beginning any repair.

WARNING: Risk of burns. Wear safety glasses, safety gloves, and


heat-protective clothing to prevent injury from hot parts and surfaces and
splashed adheisve. Do not loosen any part of the manifold, hoses, or
applicators until you stop the pump motors and relieve system pressure.

1. Perform one of the following activities before you begin:


S If the pump and heating system are working, flush the system to
remove as much adhesive as possible.
S If the pump is not working but the heating system is operational, heat
the melter to application temperature.
S If neither the pump nor the heating system are working, use a heat
gun or a flameless heating device to melt the adhesive within the
melter.
2. Stop the pump and place the system in the manual mode.
3. Relieve system pressure. Refer to Relieving System Pressure in
Section 6, Maintenance.
4. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the melter.
5. Allow the system to cool to about 93 _C (200 _F) before you begin work.
If the system cools too much, you may have difficultly removing parts
that have adhesive on them.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hydraulic System 8-13

Replacing a Manifold Fitting O-Ring


Follow this procedure to replace a manifold fitting O-ring. The O-ring should
be replaced whenever leakage occurs or whenever a fitting is removed from
the manifold. A manifold fitting may be an O-ring plug or a straight, 45_, or
90_ hose fitting. You will need the following items:
S tool kit, including a torque wrench
S cleaning supplies
S replacement manifold fitting O-ring
S O-ring lubricant
S anti-seize lubricant
1. Complete Preparing for Repairs earlier in this section.
2. See Figure 8-2. Disconnect the hose from the fitting (if applicable) and
remove the fitting from the manifold.
3. Remove the old O-ring.

410500017

Figure 8-2 Typical manifold fittings


1. Hose fitting and O-ring 2. Hose port plug and O-ring

4. Clean the fitting and the threads inside the manifold port. Refer to
Cleaning Parts in Section 6, Maintenance.
5. Lubricate the new O-ring with O-ring lubricant.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


8-14 Hydraulic System

Replacing a Manifold Fitting O-Ring (contd)

CAUTION: Risk of equipment damage. Do not stretch the O-ring more than
necessary.

6. Carefully roll the O-ring over the threads and on to the groove in the
fitting.
7. Lubricate the fitting with anti-seize lubricant.
8. Thread the fitting by hand into the manifold port. Stop threading the
fitting when the body of the fitting touches the manifold. Tighten the
fitting to 9–10 NSm (80−88 in.-lb).
9. If applicable, reconnect the hose to the fitting.
10. Trigger the applicators to purge the system of trapped air.
11. Restore the system to normal operation.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hydraulic System 8-15

Replacing a Pump
Follow this procedure to replace a pump. You will need the following items:
S tool kit, including a torque wrench
S drain pan
S cleaning supplies
S replacement pump
S replacement pump O-rings (if needed)
S anti-seize lubricant
NOTE: To rebuild a pump, contact your Nordson representative for
assistance.
1. Complete Preparing for Repairs earlier in this section. Drain as much
adhesive as possible from the tank.
2. Remove the melter tank cover and left-side and right-side panels.
3. Place a drain pan under the pump.
4. Loosen the coupling set screws and the screws that secure the motor to
the base of the melter; then push the motor and coupling away from the
pump shaft.
5. See Figure 8-3. Remove the pump screws (3) and then remove the
pump (2) and O-rings (1).

1
3 2

1 2
440300046

Figure 8-3 Replacing a pump (single-stream and dual-stream pumps shown)


1. O-rings 2. Pump 3. Pump screw

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


8-16 Hydraulic System

Replacing a Pump (contd)


6. Clean the surface of the manifold where the pump mates to it.
7. Check the pump O-rings for damage. If necessary, obtain new O-rings
and install them on the pump.
8. Apply anti-seize lubricant to the pump screws and secure the new pump
to the manifold with the screws. Use a torque wrench to tighten the
screws in a criss-cross manner to 25 NSm (222 in.-lb).
9. Push the coupling and motor assembly back onto the pump shaft and
tighten the coupling set screws. Make sure the motor and pump are
precisely aligned. Leave a small space on both sides of the coupling to
allow for heat expansion as shown in Figure 8-4.
10. Restore the system to normal operation.

440300043

Figure 8-4 Allowing expansion space for the coupling

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hydraulic System 8-17

Replacing the Hopper O-Ring (VL215 Melters)


Follow this procedure to replace the hopper O-ring cordstock on a VL215
melter. You will need the following items:
S tool kit
S replacement O-ring cordstock
S red RTV sealant
1. Complete Preparing for Repairs earlier in this section.
2. Remove the hydraulic cover.
3. Disconnect and remove the hopper heaters.
4. See Figure 8-5. Remove the screws that secure the hopper (1) to the
reservoir (3).
5. Lift the entire hopper assembly out of the melter.
6. Remove the old O-ring cordstock (2).
7. Apply RTV sealant to the new O-ring cordstock and install it.
8. Reinstall the hopper assembly.
9. Reinstall and reconnect the hopper heaters.
10. Reinstall the hydraulic cover and restore the system to normal
operation.

Figure 8-5 Replacing the hopper O-ring cordstock on a VL215 melter


1. Hopper 3. Reservoir
2. Hopper O-ring cordstock

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


8-18 Hydraulic System

Replacing the Manifold O-Rings


Follow this procedure to replace the manifold O-rings. You will need the
following items:
S tool kit
S O-ring lubricant
S replacement manifold O-rings
1. Complete Preparing for Repairs earlier in this section.
2. Remove the hydraulic cover.
3. (VL215 only) Disconnect and remove the hopper heaters.
4. Disconnect all thermostats and RTDs.
NOTE: VL210 melters have a tank thermostat and RTD. VL215 melters
have a reservoir thermostat and RTD.

5. Remove the pump from the manifold. Refer to Replacing a Pump earlier
in this section as needed.
6. See Figure 8-6. Remove the screws (6) that secure the hydraulic
assembly to the frame and remove the hydraulic assembly.
7. Remove the screws (5) that secure the manifold (4) to the tank (1) or
hopper/reservoir assembly (2) and detach the manifold.
8. Apply O-ring lubricant to two new manifold O-rings (3) and install them
on the top of the manifold.
9. Reattach the manifold to the tank or hopper/reservoir assembly.
10. Reinstall the hydraulic assembly.
11. Reinstall the pump. Refer to Replacing a Pump earlier in this section as
needed.
12. (VL215 only) Reinstall and reconnect the hopper heaters.
13. Reconnect all thermostats and RTDs.
14. Restore the system to normal operation.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hydraulic System 8-19

1 2

5
.
.

Figure 8-6 Replacing the manifold O-rings


1. Tank (VL210) 3. Manifold O-ring 5. Manifold-to-tank/reservoir
2. Hopper and reservoir (VL215) 4. Manifold screws
6. Hydraulic assembly-to-frame
screws

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


8-20 Hydraulic System

Replacing a Pressure Relief Valve


Follow this procedure to replace a pressure relief valve. The pressure relief
valves are located inside the tank (VL210) or reservoir (VL215). You will
need the following items:
S tool kit
S replacement pressure relief valve (with O-ring)
S anti-seize lubricant

WARNING: Failure to relieve system pressure can result in serious burns


when the pressure relief valve is removed.

1. Complete Preparing for Repairs earlier in this section.


2. Remove the hydraulic cover.
3. (VL215 only) Disconnect and remove the hopper heaters.
4. (VL215 only) Remove the screws that secure the hopper to the reservoir
and lift the hopper out of the melter.
5. See Figure 8-7. Unscrew and remove the pressure relief valve from the
bottom of the tank/reservoir.
6. Lubricate the threads of the new valve with anti-seize lubricant and
install it. The valve screws through the tank/reservoir into the manifold.
7. (VL215 only) Reinstall the hopper.
8. (VL215 only) Reinstall and reconnect the hopper heaters.
9. Reinstall the hydraulic cover and restore the system to normal
operation.

Figure 8-7 Replacing a pressure relief valve

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hydraulic System 8-21

Cleaning or Replacing a Circulation Control Valve


Follow this procedure to clean or replace a circulation control valve. You will
need the following items:
S tool kit, including a torque wrench
S cleaning supplies
S replacement parts as appropriate
S cylindrical retaining adhesive
S anti-seize lubricant

WARNING: Failure to relieve system pressure can result in serious burns


when the circulation control valve is removed.

1. Complete Preparing for Repairs earlier in this section.


2. See Figure 8-8. Unscrew and remove the defective circulation control
valve from the manifold. If you are replacing the entire valve, skip to
step 6.

690400003

Figure 8-8 Removing a circulation control valve

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


8-22 Hydraulic System

Cleaning or Replacing a Circulation Control Valve (contd)


3. See Figure 8-9. Disassemble the circulation control valve.

3 5

7 690400004

Figure 8-9 Circulation control valve components


1. Valve body 5. O-ring
2. Spool (adjustment screw) 6. Set screw
3. O-ring 7. Locking nut
4. O-ring

4. Inspect the valve components for wear or damage. Replace any worn or
damaged components. Clean the undamaged components. Refer to
Cleaning Parts in Section 6, Maintenance.
5. Reassemble the valve. Apply cylindrical retaining adhesive to the set
screw and anti-seize lubricant to the valve body threads.
6. Install the valve in the manifold.
7. Restore the system to normal operation.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Drive System 9-1

Section 9
Drive System

WARNING: Allow only personnel with appropriate training and experience


to operate or service the equipment. The use of untrained or inexperienced
personnel to operate or service the equipment can result in injury, including
death, to themselves and others, and damage to the equipment.

Introduction
This section contains troubleshooting and repair procedures for the melter’s
drive system. It is organized as follows:
S Drive System Overview
S Troubleshooting Table
S Drive System Component Replacement
Troubleshooting of the drive system begins when the pump motor does not
operate properly. If you try all the troubleshooting suggestions in this section
and still need assistance solving drive system problems, contact your
Nordson representative.

Before performing any troubleshooting or repair activities, review Section 1,


Safety.

The following sections of this manual contain additional information on the


drive system:

S Section 4, Setup, includes the procedure for setting the motor speed
for manual-mode operation.
S Section 5, Operation, includes procedures for operating the pump in
the manual or gear-to-line mode.
S Section 6, Maintenance, includes the procedure for replacing the
motor transmission grease.
S Section 7, Electrical System, includes troubleshooting information for
the motor control system.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


9-2 Drive System

Introduction (contd)

You will need a well-stocked tool kit and a sufficient inventory of spare parts
and supplies. Each repair procedure is preceded by a list of the items you
will need. Refer to Tools and Supplies in Section 6, Maintenance, for a list of
recommended tools and supplies. Refer to Section 11, Parts, for the part
numbers of all parts and supplies and for a comprehensive list of
recommended spare parts and supplies.

Drive System Overview


The drive system drives the pump. It consists of a 7/8 hp AC gear motor with
27:1 reduction and all associated parts, including a coupling. Figures 9-1
and 9-2 show the key parts of the drive system and how the drive system
interfaces with the pump. For overtemperature protection, the motor has a
thermal contact that shuts it off when it overheats.

The components of the drive system vary depending on the melter


configuration—refer to the correct illustrations for your melter. If you need
assistance determining the configuration of your melter, refer to Melter
Identification in Section 2, Description, to determine the part number of your
melter and then contact your Nordson representative.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Drive System 9-3

Figure 9-1 Key parts of a drive system with a Brook Hansen motor
1. Pump (dual-stream pump shown) 3. Motor
2. Coupling

2
1

Figure 9-2 Key parts of a drive system with an SEW Eurodrive motor
1. Pump (dual-stream pump shown) 3. Motor
2. Coupling

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


9-4 Drive System

Troubleshooting Table
Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action
1. Motor stops or System-ready condition not reached Wait for the system-ready time delay (if
fails to start used) to expire and/or for the READY
light on the Vista control panel to turn
on.
No power to melter or motor Ensure that the power at the main
start/stop switch in off position branch circuit disconnect is on and that
the main disconnect and Vista POWER
switches are in the ON position. Ensure
also that the motor start/stop switch is in
the on position.
Remote motor/start switch being used If a remote motor/stop switch is being
but motor start/stop switch on melter used, place the motor start/stop switch
not in off position on the melter in the off position.
Gear-to-line/manual switch in G Start the production line or place the
(gear-to-line position) when line not gear-to-line/manual switch in the HAND
running (manual) position to run in the manual
mode.
Pump speed set at 0 Use the motor speed dial on the motor
control panel to increase the pump
speed.
Motor drive keypad indicating a Lower the Vista control assembly and
warning or fault check the display on the motor drive
keypad. If it shows a warning or fault
code, refer to Motor Control System
Indicating a Warning or Fault in
Section 7, Electrical System.
Loose or disconnected motor cable Tighten or reconnect the motor cable.
Loose line-speed signal input Check the input/output wiring
connections connections. Refer to Connecting
Input/Output Wiring in Section 3,
Installation, as needed.
All motor drive fuses blown (the drive Check the continuity of the fuses. If
has three fuses) there is no continuity, the fuses are
blown. Replace the fuses. Refer to
Replacing a Motor Control System
Component in Section 7, Electrical
System.
Continued on next page

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Drive System 9-5

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action


1. Motor stops or Motor overheated Wait for the motor to cool down, then
fails to start restart the motor. If the motor continues
(contd.) to overheat, check the speed setting to
ensure that the maximum speed of
2,480 rpm is not being exceeded. If the
maximum speed is not being exceeded,
wait for the motor to cool down and then
check the continuity of the thermal
contact. If there is no continuity, replace
the motor. Refer to Drive System
Component Replacement in this section.
Motor drive enable relay failed Replace the relay. Refer to Replacing a
Motor Control System Component in
Section 7, Electrical System.
Motor drive failed Replace the motor drive. Refer to
Replacing a Motor Control System
Component in Section 7, Electrical
System.
Coupling worn or damaged Check the coupling. Replace it if it is
worn or damaged. Refer to Drive
System Component Replacement in this
section.
Seized motor bearings Check that the motor shaft rotates. If it
does not, replace the motor. Refer to
Drive System Component Replacement
in this section.
Motor shaft key sheared Replace the motor. Refer to Drive
System Component Replacement in this
section.
Motor failed Replace the motor. Refer to Drive
System Component Replacement in this
section.
2. Motor runs Blown motor drive fuse or fuses (the Check the motor drive fuse continuity. If
erratically or drive has three fuses) there is no continuity, a fuse is blown.
makes unusual Replace blown fuses. Refer to
noises Replacing a Motor Control System
Component in Section 7, Electrical
System.
3. Motor runs Motor start/stop switch or Replace the switch or potentiometer.
intermittently potentiometer failed Refer to Replacing a Motor Control
System Component in Section 7,
Electrical System.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


9-6 Drive System

Drive System Component Replacement


Follow this procedure to replace a motor or coupling. You will need the
following items:
S appropriate tools
S replacement coupling or motor
S anti-seize lubricant (if needed)
1. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the melter.
2. Remove the hydraulic cover and the left- and right-side control cabinet
covers.
3. Disconnect the motor cable wires, noting their terminal positions.
4. See Figure 9-3 or 9-4 as applicable. Loosen the set screws that secure
the coupling (2) to the pump (1) shaft.
5. Remove the hardware that secures the motor (3) to the base of the
melter; then carefully push the motor and coupling away from the pump.
6. Loosen the set screw that secures the coupling to the motor shaft and
remove the coupling.
7. Inspect the coupling for damage. Obtain a new coupling if necessary.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Drive System 9-7

Figure 9-3 Components of a drive system with a Brook Hansen motor


1. Pump (dual-stream pump shown) 3. Motor
2. Coupling

2
1

Figure 9-4 Key parts of a drive system with an SEW Eurodrive motor
1. Pump (dual-stream pump shown) 3. Motor
2. Coupling

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


9-8 Drive System

Drive System Component Replacement (contd)


8. Install the coupling on the new motor shaft as follows:
a. Remove the protective coating from the new motor shaft.
b. Slide the coupling onto the motor shaft without using force (no jolting
or striking). If this is difficult, sand the parallel keys and the shaft with
an abrasive emery cloth. If necessary, use anti-seize lubricant to
lubricate the parallel keys and the shaft.
c. Tighten the coupling set screw to secure the coupling to the motor
shaft.
9. Loosely install the new motor on the melter base and slide the coupling
and motor assembly onto the pump shaft; then tighten the set screws
that secure the coupling to the pump shaft. Ensure that the motor and
pump are precisely aligned. Leave a small space on both sides of the
coupling to allow for heat expansion, as shown in Figure 9-5.

ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄ
440300035

Figure 9-5 Allowing heat expansion space for the coupling


10. Tighten the hardware that secures the motor to the base.
11. Reconnect the motor cable wires to the same terminals from which they
were disconnected.
12. Reinstall the melter covers and restore the system to normal operation.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hoses 10-1

Section 10
Hoses

WARNING: Allow only personnel with appropriate training and experience


to operate or service the equipment. The use of untrained or inexperienced
personnel to operate or service the equipment can result in injury, including
death, to themselves and others, and damage to the equipment.

Introduction
This section contains troubleshooting and repair procedures for the hot melt
system hoses. It is organized as follows:
S Hose Overview
S Troubleshooting Table
S Hose Replacement
Hose troubleshooting begins when a hose leaks or when the flow of
adhesive from an applicator stops or diminishes unexpectedly. If you try all
the troubleshooting suggestions in this section and still need assistance
solving hose problems, contact your Nordson representative.

Before performing any troubleshooting or repair activities, review Section 1,


Safety.

The following sections of this manual contain additional information on


hoses:

S Section 3, Installation, includes procedures for installing hoses.


S Section 7, Electrical System, includes procedures for checking
resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) and heaters, including
hose RTDs and heaters.
S Section 8, Hydraulic System, includes procedures for
troubleshooting the entire hydraulic system.
S Section 12, Technical Data, includes hose specifications.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


10-2 Hoses

Introduction (contd)

You will need a well-stocked tool kit and a sufficient inventory of spare parts
and supplies. Each repair procedure is preceded by a list of the items you
will need. Refer to Tools and Supplies in Section 6, Maintenance, for a list of
recommended tools and supplies. Refer to Section 11, Parts, for the part
numbers of all parts and supplies and for a comprehensive list of
recommended spare parts and supplies.

Hose Overview
Flexible, electrically heated hoses transport the adhesive in a hot melt
system from one part of the system to another. An RTD in the hose senses
the temperature of the adhesive as it exits the hose and provides feedback
to the control system. When the control system determines that the hose
needs heat, power is applied through a resistive heating element that is
wrapped along the length of the hose. The hose cordset is usually
connected to an electrical receptacle on the melter.

3
2
1

ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ 450100001

Figure 10-1 Key parts of the hose (hose with T-style cordset shown)
1. Applicator cordset receptacle 3. Hose cordset
2. Dust cover

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hoses 10-3

Troubleshooting Table
Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action
1. Hose leaks at inlet or Loose hose hydraulic connection Use two wrenches as shown in
outlet Figure 10-2 to tighten the connection.
Failed O-ring or stripped hose Replace the hose fitting and/or
fitting threads O-ring. Refer to Replacing a Manifold
Fitting O-Ring in Section 8, Hydraulic
System.
2. No output from Hose blocked Check for a blocked hose. If the hose
applicator is not blocked, refer to the applicator
manual to troubleshoot the applicator.
3. Hose not heating Refer to Zone Not Heating in Section 7, Electrical System.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


10-4 Hoses

Hose Replacement
Use these procedures to replace a hose.

WARNING: Do not attempt to repair a hose. You may further damage the
hose, cause improper operation, or suffer personal injury.

Removing a Hose
Follow this procedure to remove a hose.

1. Stop the pump and place the system in the manual mode.
2. Relieve system pressure. Refer to Relieving System Pressure in
Section 6, Maintenance.
3. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the melter.
4. Disconnect the hose cordset from the melter.
5. Disconnect the applicator cordset from the hose.
6. See Figure 10-2. Use two wrenches to disconnect the hose from the
hose connectors at the melter and applicator ends of the hose. Place
one wrench on the swivel fitting and the other on the connector.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 10-2 Removing a hose
450000001

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Hoses 10-5

Installing a Hose
Follow this procedure to install a hose.

1. Position the hose so that adhesive will enter the hose at the hose
cordset end. Follow the hose routing guidelines shown in Figure 10-3.
2. Use two wrenches to connect the hose to the hose connectors at the
melter and applicator. Do not over-tighten.
3. Plug the hose cordset into its receptacle on the melter.
4. Plug the applicator cordset into the cordset receptacle on the hose.
5. Restore the system to normal operation.
6. Check the hose for leakage. Retighten fittings as necessary.
NOTE: Severe leaking often indicates that an O-ring is missing or
damaged or that you are using the wrong type of O-ring. Replace
O-rings as necessary.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


10-6 Hoses

Installing a Hose (contd)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
P/N 111 940 ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
X
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
X=13 mm (0.50 in.)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
R=203 mm (8.00 in.)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
P/N 271 486 − 8 mm (5/16 in.)
P/N 274 174 − 16 mm (5/8 in.)
P/N 274 174 − 29 mm (1 1/8 in.)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ 450000002

Figure 10-3 Hose handling guidelines

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-1

Section 11
Parts

Using the Illustrated Parts Lists


To order parts, call the Nordson Customer Service Center or your local
Nordson representative. Use these five-column parts lists, and the
accompanying illustrations, to describe and locate parts correctly. The
following chart provides guidance for reading the parts lists.

The number in the Item column corresponds to the circled item number in the
parts list illustration. A dash in this column indicates that the item is an
assembly.

The number in the Part column is the Nordson part number you can
use to order the part. A series of dashes indicates that the part is
not saleable. In this case, you must order either the assembly in
which the part is used or a service kit that includes the part.

The Description column describes the part and sometimes


includes dimensions or specifications.

The Note column contains letters that refer to notes at the


bottom of the parts list. These notes provide important
information about the part.

The Quantity column tells you how many of the part is


used to manufacture the assembly shown in the parts
list illustration. A dash or AR in this column indicates
that the amount of the item required in the assembly is
not quantifiable.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


— 0000000 Assembly A —
1 000000 S Part of assembly A 2 A
2 ------ S S Part of item 1 1
3 0000000 S S S Part of item 2 AR
NS 000000 S S S S Part of item 3 2
NOTE A: Important information about item 1
AR: As Required
NS: Not Shown

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-2 Parts

Unit Assembly Parts List


The unit assembly parts vary depending on the melter configuration—refer
to the correct parts list for your melter. If you need assistance determining
the configuration of your melter, refer to Melter Identification in Section 2,
Description, to determine the part number of your melter and then contact
your Nordson representative.

VL210 Unit Parts


See Figure 11-1.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 779664 Handle, lid 1
2 779708 Lid, tank/hopper 1
3 779682 Spacer, lid, tank/hopper 6
4 779707 Lid, inner 1
5 779724 Cover, tank 1
6 104948 Gasket, tank 1
7 779704 Cover, filter 1
8 779895 Filter, control cabinet 1
9 779702 Cover, control cabinet, right-side 1
10 779701 Cover, control cabinet, left-side 1
11 779700 Cabinet, control 1
12 779705 Enclosure, hydraulic 1
13 779649 Spacer, manifold 4
14 779703 Base 1
NS 777603 Fan assembly 1 A
NS 900413 Sealant, RTV, red, 2.8 oz tube AR B
NOTE A: Refer to Electrical System Parts Lists later in this section for the location of this fan.
B: Apply RTV sealant to the tank gasket.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-3

10 u

12

11

13
14

Figure 11-1 VL210 unit parts

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-4 Parts

VL215 Unit Parts


See Figure 11-2.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 779664 Handle, lid 1
2 1060508 Lid, tank/hopper 1
3 779682 Spacer, lid, tank/hopper 4
4 1060507 Lid, inner 1
5 1059804 Cover, top, hopper 1
6 1059358 Gasket, top, hopper 1
7 1060333 Filter, fan, 204 mm 2
8 1060332 Fan, 240 VAC, 150 cfm 1
9 1060025 Cover, control cabinet, right-side 1
10 1060024 Cover, control cabinet, left-side 1
11 1059781 Enclosure, electrical, cabinet 1
12 1060044 Enclosure, hydraulic 1
13 1053588 Plate, front, motor control 1
14 779649 Spacer, manifold 4
15 779703 Base 1
NS 900413 Sealant, RTV, red, 2.8 oz tube AR A
NOTE A: Apply RTV sealant to the hopper gasket.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-5

10

11

12 13

8 7

14

15

Figure 11-2 VL215 unit parts

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-6 Parts

Hydraulic Assembly Parts Lists


The hydraulic assembly includes the tank or hopper and reservoir assembly,
the manifold, and all associated parts. These assemblies vary depending on
the melter configuration—refer to the correct parts lists for your melter. If
you need assistance determining the configuration of your melter, refer to
Melter Identification in Section 2, Description, to determine the part number
of your melter and then contact your Nordson representative.

VL210 Tank Parts


See Figure 11-3.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1−13 — Item nos. not used —
14 779923 Tank, machined 1
15 — Item no. not used —
16 230127 Harness, wire, thermostat, open-on-rise, 1
26-in. leads
17 105721 Harness, wire, RTD 1
18 982017 Screw, pan, recessed, M3 x 8 4
19 983411 Washer, flat, narrow, M3 2
20 983400 Washer, lock, split, M3 2
21 274667 Plate, retainer, RTD 1
NS 779921 Insulation, fiberglass, 1200 x 600 x 30 mm 1
NS 931074 Tape, insulation 1 ft A
NS 900298 Compound, heat sink, 5 oz tube AR B
NOTE A: This tape is used to secure the insulation around the tank.
B: Apply heat-sink compound to the RTD.
NS: Not Shown
AR: As Required

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-7

14

17

21 18
20
19

16
19 18
20

Figure 11-3 VL210 tank parts

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-8 Parts

VL215 Hopper and Reservoir Parts


See Figure 11-3.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1−11 — Item nos. not used —
12 1054575 Reservoir 1
13 — Item no. not used —
14 230127 Harness, wire, thermostat, open-on-rise, 1
26-in. leads
15 105721 Harness, wire, RTD 1
16 982017 Screw, pan, recessed, M3 x 8 2
17 983411 Washer, flat, narrow, M3 2
18 983400 Washer, lock, split, M3 2
19 1060250 Cartridge heater, 240 VAC, 1/2 in., 10 in., 500 W 8
20 — Item no. not used —
21 1056454 Deflector, adhesive 1
22 1058990 Cordstock, 3 mm OD, Viton, 75 D 1
23 1059710 Assembly, hopper 1
24 982032 Screw, socket, M6 x 30 20
25 983410 Washer, flat, narrow, M6 20
26 983409 Washer, lock, split, M6 20
NS 779921 Insulation, fiberglass, 1200 x 600 x 30 mm 0.5
NS 931074 Tape, insulation 3.3 ft A
NS 900298 Compound, heat sink, 5 oz tube AR B
NS 900413 Sealant, RTV, red, 2.8 oz tube AR C
NOTE A: This tape is used to secure the insulation around the hopper and reservoir.
B: Apply heat sink compound to the RTD.
C: Apply RTV sealant to the cordstock.
AR: As Required
NS: Not Shown

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-9

24 25 26

23

21

22

19

14

12

16 17 18

15

Figure 11-4 VL215 hopper and reservoir parts

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-10 Parts

One Single-Stream Pump Manifold Parts


See Figure 11-5.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 779792 Manifold, adhesive, two single-stream pumps 1
2 288977 Valve, pressure relief 1
2A 945034 S O-ring, Viton, 5/16-in. tube 1
3 973574 Plug, O-ring, straight-thread, 9/16-18 16
4 — Item no. not used —
5 779625 Bushing, 1.125-12 x 1.312-12 1
6 345217 Screw, set, M3 x 5, cone-point 2
7 945037 O-ring, Viton, 1-in. tube 1
8 147883 Filter assembly, in-out, 0.006 1 A
NS 147884 S Screen, filter, 0.006 in. mesh 1
9 271484 Valve, drain 1
10 365246 Valve assembly, circulation 1 B
11 940310 O-ring, Viton, 1.750 x 1.875 x 0.063 in. 2
12 — Item no. not used —
13 982037 Screw, socket, M8 x 45 12
14 779791 Plug, tank/manifold, one single-stream pump 1
15 942181 O-ring, Viton, 1.250 x 1.500 x 0.125 2
16 973583 Plug, O-ring, straight-thread, 1 5/16-12 1
17 973591 Plug, O-ring, straight-thread, 1 1/16-12 1
18 973402 Pipe, plug, socket, flush, 1/8 in. 1
19 ------ Pump assembly 1 C
NS 900223 Lubricant, O-ring, Parker, 4 oz AR D
NOTE A: Refer to Manifold Filter Parts later in this section.
B: Refer to Circulation Control Valve Parts later in this section.
C: Refer to Pump Parts Lists later in this section.
D: Apply O-ring lubricant to all O-rings and O-ring plugs.
AR: As Required
NS: Not Shown

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-11

15

2 2A

14

1 11

3
19

17

10

16

18

6
13

Figure 11-5 One single-stream pump manifold parts

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-12 Parts

Two Single-Stream Pump Manifold Parts


See Figure 11-6.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 779792 Manifold, adhesive, two single-stream pumps 1
2 288977 Valve, pressure relief 2
2A 945034 S O-ring, Viton, 5/16-in. tube 1
3 973574 Plug, O-ring, straight-thread, 9/16-18 16
4 — Item no. not used —
5 779625 Bushing, 1.125-12 x 1.312-12 2
6 345217 Screw, set, M3 x 5, cone-point 4
7 945037 O-ring, Viton, 1-in. tube 2
8 147883 Filter assembly, in-out, 0.006 2 A
NS 147884 S Screen, filter, 0.006 in. mesh 1
9 271484 Valve, drain 2
10 365246 Valve assembly, circulation 2 B
11 940310 O-ring, Viton, 1.750 x 1.875 x 0.063 in. 2
12 — Item no. not used —
13 982037 Screw, socket, M8 x 45 12
14 ------ Pump assembly 2 C
NS 900223 Lubricant, O-ring, Parker, 4 oz AR D
NOTE A: Refer to Manifold Filter Parts later in this section.
B: Refer to Circulation Control Valve Parts later in this section.
C: Refer to Pump Parts Lists later in this section.
D: Apply O-ring lubricant to all O-rings and O-ring plugs.
AR: As Required
NS: Not Shown

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-13

2 2A

11
1

3 14

10

9 13
8

Figure 11-6 Two single-stream pump manifold parts

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-14 Parts

One Dual-Stream Pump Manifold Parts


See Figure 11-7.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 779657 Manifold, adhesive, one dual-stream pump 1
2 288977 Valve, pressure relief 2
2A 945034 S O-ring, Viton, 5/16-in. tube 1
3 973574 Plug, O-ring, straight-thread, 9/16-18 23
4 973576 Plug, O-ring, straight-thread, 5/16-24 1
5 779625 Bushing, 1.125-12 x 1.312-12 2
6 345217 Screw, set, M3 x 5, cone-point 4
7 945037 O-ring, Viton, 1-in. tube 2
8 147883 Filter assembly, in-out, 0.006 2 A
NS 147884 S Screen, filter, 0.006 in. mesh 1
9 271484 Valve, drain 2
10 365246 Valve assembly, circulation 2 B
11 940310 O-ring, Viton, 1.750 x 1.875 x 0.063 in. 2
12 — Item no. not used —
13 982037 Screw, socket, M8 x 45 12
14 ------ Pump assembly 1 C
NS 900223 Lubricant, O-ring, Parker, 4 oz AR D
NOTE A: Refer to Manifold Filter Parts later in this section.
B: Refer to Circulation Control Valve Parts later in this section.
C: Refer to Pump Parts Lists later in this section.
D: Apply O-ring lubricant to all O-rings and O-ring plugs.
AR: As Required
NS: Not Shown

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-15

2 2A

3 11

14

10

7 5

9 13

3
4

Figure 11-7 One dual-stream pump manifold parts (front view of manifold shown in inset A)

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-16 Parts

Manifold Filter Parts


See Figure 11-8.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


— 147883 Manifold filter assembly —
1 504141 S Bung 1
2 941201 S O-ring, Viton, 1.000 x 1.188 x 0.094 in. 1
3 171561 S Tube, 0.375 x 0.245 x 2.875 in. 1
4 147884 S Screen 1
5 981108 S Screw, fillister, 10-32 x 3.375 in. 1
6 240749 S Tag, filter warning 1
7 981905 S Screw, drive, round, 2.00 x 0.187 in. 1
8 900236 S Sealant, paste AR
AR: As Required

7
5

ÑÑÑÑÑ
8

ÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑ 4
690101016

Figure 11-8 Manifold filter parts

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-17

Circulation Control Valve Parts


See Figure 11-9.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


— 365246 Circulation control valve assembly —
1 365242 S Body, valve 1
2 365243 S Spool (adjustment screw) 1
3 940101 S O-ring, Viton, 0.239 ID x 0.070 W 1
4 940191 S O-ring, Viton, 0.813 x 0.938 x 0.063 1
5 945039 S O-ring, Viton, 3/4 in. tube 1
6 982267 S Screw, set, dog, M4 x 8 1
7 984704 S Nut, hex, M12 1
8 900419 S Adhesive, retaining cylindrical AR
9 900344 S Lubricant, Never Seez, 8 oz can AR
AR: As Required

2 9

3
6 8

5
4

690401008

Figure 11-9 Circulation control valve parts

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-18 Parts

Pump Parts Lists


See Figure 11-11. The pumps present on the melter vary depending on the
melter configuration—refer to the correct parts lists for your melter. If you
need assistance determining the configuration of your melter, refer to Melter
Identification in Section 2, Description, to determine the part number of your
melter and then contact your Nordson representative.

Single-Stream Pumps
See Figure 11-10.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 ------ Pump AR A
2 252595 O-ring, 10.0 X 1.5 mm 1
3 982624 Screw, hex, cap, M8 x 60 4
NS 253813 Packing ring 1 B
NS 253814 Bushing 1 B
NOTE A: Refer to Table 11-1 for pump part numbers.
B: These parts are needed only if you want to rebuild a pump. To rebuild a pump, contact your Nordson
representative for assistance.
AR: As Required
NS: Not Shown

Figure 11-10 Single-stream pump parts

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-19

Dual-Stream Pumps
See Figure 11-11.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 ------ Pump, dual-stream AR A
2 982624 Screw, hex, cap, M8 x 60 6
3 253843 O-ring, 18.0 x 1.5 mm 2
4 252595 O-ring, 10.0 x 1.5 mm 2
NS 253813 Packing ring 1 B
NS 253814 Bushing 1 B
NOTE A: Refer to Table 11-1 for pump part numbers.
B: These parts are needed only if you want to rebuild a pump. To rebuild a pump, contact your Nordson
representative for assistance.
AR: As Required
NS: Not Shown

2
4

Figure 11-11 Dual-stream pump parts

Table 11-1 Pump Part Numbers


Pump Type Pump Part Number Model Flow (g/min)
Single-stream
g 254316 PR 12M1 17.7−141.4
254247 PR 12M2 35.2−282.0
Dual-stream 291997 PU 12-2M1 17.7−141.4
406435 PU 18-2ML 26.5−212.0

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-20 Parts

Drive System Parts Lists


The drive system includes the motor, coupling, and all associated parts that
drive the pump. The drive system varies depending on the melter
configuration—refer to the correct parts lists for your melter. If you need
assistance determining the configuration of your melter, refer to Melter
Identification in Section 2, Description, to determine the part number of your
melter and then contact your Nordson representative.

Brook Hansen Motor


See Figure 11-12.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 7109020 Motor, AC gear, 7/8 hp, 230 VAC, 3∅, 2480 rpm, 1
27:1 reduction (includes cable), Brook Hansen
2 779604 Coupling 1
3 982036 Screw, socket, M8 x 30 4
4 983417 Washer, flat, oversized, M8 4
5 983404 Washer, lock, split, M8 4
6 984707 Nut, hex, M8 4

2
1

4
5

Figure 11-12 Brook Hansen motor drive system parts

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-21

SEW Eurodrive Motor


See Figure 11-13.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 7400005 Motor, AC gear, 0.55 kw, 230 VAC, 3∅, 1380 rpm, 1
15.53:1 reduction (includes cable), SEW Eurodrive
2 7400006 Plate, mounting, gear motor 1
3 983417 Washer, flat, oversized, M8 4
4 983707 Nut, hex, M8 4
5 779604 Coupling 1

Figure 11-13 SEW Eurodrive motor drive system parts

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-22 Parts

Electrical System Parts Lists


The electrical system includes the Vista control system and the motor
controls. The motor controls vary depending on the melter
configuration—refer to the correct parts lists for your melter. If you need
assistance determining the configuration of your melter, refer to Melter
Identification in Section 2, Description, to determine the part number of your
melter and then contact your Nordson representative.

Electrical System Parts


See Figure 11-14. The figure shows inside views of the control-end panel,
the center panel, and the base.

NOTE: For additional filter fan part numbers, refer to the appropriate frame
assembly parts list earlier in this section.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 1046219 Motor control, AC drive,1-phase, 240 VAC,1 hp 1
2 1046270 Motor control, keypad 1
3 777604 Relay, motor drive enable, 24 VDC, DPDT 1
4 777012 Circuit breaker, 230−440 V, 16 A 2
5 777001 Switch, main disconnect 1
6 779617 Terminal block, input/output 1
7 ------ Vista control assembly 1 A
8 ------ Motor controls 1 B
9 777603 Fan assembly 1 C
NS ------ Cable, motor 1 D
NOTE A: Refer to Vista Control Assembly Parts later in this section.
B: Refer to Motor Control Parts later in this section.
C: This fan is present only on VL210 melters.
D: The motor cable is part of the motor assembly. To replace the cable, order a new motor. Refer to the
previous parts list, Drive System Parts List.
NS: Not Shown

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-23

7 1 2

−1A31

−8A31
SIEMENS

J2

X1
I Jog

0 Menu P

X3

X2

TB1

J4
XS2 XS1

−1K81

4 1
5
TB2

13
9
J2
J9

12
8

14
3

−XL8
2
1
XP2

−XL7
2
1
3

−XL6
2
1
3

−XL5
2
−1Q21

1
−8S51

1 3 5

−8Q32
16A

−8Q31
16A
−8R31

2 4 6
−8S21

3
4
8 5 9

6
9 10 11 12 13 14
8
−XM

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Figure 11-14 Electrical system parts (VL210 shown)

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-24 Parts

Vista Control Assembly Parts


See Figure 11-15.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


— 234428 Control assembly, Vista (repair kit) — A
1 337645 Gasket, D-shaped 1
2 225453 Nut, spring, U-type 2
3 225458 Control panel, Vista 1
4 225451 Power switch, 250 VAC, 16 A, panel-mounted 1
5 225450 Boot, power switch 1
6 225448 Harness, power switch 1
7 234426 Display board, Vista (service kit) 1
8 982970 Screw, hex, slotted, M4 x 8, with nylon patch 6
9 185092 Connector, 40-position (display board to control 1
board)
10 234429 Control board, Vista (service kit) 1
11 982971 Screw, hex, M4 x 12, with nylon patch 10
12 234424 Firmware, Vista (service kit) 1
13 232540 Connector, 26-position (control board to power 1
board)
14 234427 Power board, Vista (service kit) 1
15 982974 Screw, hex, slotted, M4 x 12, with lock washer 6
16 982975 Screw, hex, slotted, M4 x 16, with lock washer 6
17 302882 Screw, socket, cap, M3 x 10, with nylon patch 1
18 225446 Clamp, triac, power board 2
19 227569 Voltage plug, power board, 400/230 VAC (with 1 B
neutral), 3∅
227568 Voltage plug, power board, 200−240 VAC, 3∅ 1 B
20 220592 Connector, plug, power board, 6-position, 5 mm 1
21 939491 Fuse, power board, 25.0 A, fast acting, 600 VAC 2 C
22 310904 Fuse, power board, 1.0 A, slow-blow, 250 VAC, 2 D
5 x 20 mm
23 939683 Fuse, power board, 6.3 A, fast acting, 250 VAC, 8 E
5 x 20 mm
24 232681 Bracket, ground wire 1
25 230261 Terminal, ground wire, 6−14 AWG 1
NS 1018481 Cover, Vista power board 1
NS 231568 Spacer, clear, M4 x 49 4
NOTE A: Order this part for a complete Vista control assembly.
B: The appearance of this voltage plug varies depending on the voltage.
C: Fuses for the hoses and applicators (F1 through F8 on the power board).
D: Fuses for the tank heater (F11 and F12 on the power board).
E: Fuses for main power (F9 and F10 on the power board).
NS: Not Shown

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-25

24 15
7 25
8
4

2 5

12 11

11
23
13
15 19

18

16
5
8 9

10
11
15
14 21

22 18
6 15 16
20 17
610401001

Figure 11-15 Vista control assembly parts

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-26 Parts

VL210 Motor Control Parts


See Figure 11-16.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 777606 Dial, counting, 10, turn 1 or 2
2 779667 Switch, rocker, DPDT, gold contacts 1 or 2
3 777605 Potentiometer, 5K ohm, 10 turn 1 or 2

2
1

Figure 11-16 VL210 motor control parts

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-27

VL215 Motor Control Parts


See Figure 11-17.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 777606 Dial, counting, 10, turn 1 or 2
2 777713 Switch, multi-function 1 or 2
3 777605 Potentiometer, 5K ohm, 10 turn 1 or 2
4 779667 Switch, rocker, DPDT, gold contacts 1 or 2

2
1

Figure 11-17 VL215 motor control parts

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-28 Parts

Voltage Conversion Kit Parts


This kit is used to convert the melter from 400 VAC electrical service to
240 VAC electrical service. Refer to Changing the Melter Voltage in
Section 3, Installation, for the conversion procedure.

Part Description Note


1017674 Kit, voltage conversion
227568 S Voltage plug, power board, 200−240 VAC, 3∅
1010802 S Jumper, L2−N

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-29

Hoses and Hose Fittings


VL200 melters use the same hoses (T-style) as Series 3000 and
Series 6000 melters. The following parts list provides part numbers for the
most commonly used hoses. The hose fitting parts lists provide part
numbers for the fittings that can be used to connect the hoses to the
manifold or to an applicator.

Hoses
See Figure 11-18. All these hoses have 120 ohm nickel RTDs.

Item Part Description Quantity Note


— 274790 Hose, 230 VAC, 8 mm (5/16 in.) ID, 2 ft —
— 274791 Hose, 230 VAC, 8 mm (5/16 in.) ID, 4 ft —
— 274792 Hose, 230 VAC, 8 mm (5/16 in.) ID, 6 ft —
— 274793 Hose, 230 VAC, 8 mm (5/16 in.) ID, 8 ft —
— 274794 Hose, 230 VAC, 8 mm (5/16 in.) ID, 10 ft —
— 274795 Hose, 230 VAC, 8 mm (5/16 in.) ID, 12 ft —
— 274796 Hose, 230 VAC, 8 mm (5/16 in.) ID, 16 ft —
— 274797 Hose, 230 VAC, 8 mm (5/16 in.) ID, 24 ft —
— 809822 Hose, 230 VAC, 8 mm (5/16 in.) ID, 30 ft —
1 274724 S Dust cap 1
2 ------ Hose fitting 1 A
3 945032 S O-ring, Viton, 3/8 in. tube 1
NOTE A: Refer to Hose Fittings later in this section.

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
2 3
450101001

Figure 11-18 Hose parts (T-style cordset)

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-30 Parts

Hose Fittings
As delivered, the melter manifold hose ports are plugged. To connect a
hose to the manifold, a plug must be removed and a hose fitting installed.
Hose fittings are not shipped with hoses and therefore must be ordered
separately. Nordson offers a variety of hose-to-melter and
hose-to-applicator fitting sizes in straight, 45-degree, and 90-degree
configurations.

Non-Swivel Fittings
See Figure 11-19. Unless noted, these fittings can be used at either the
melter end or the applicator end of a hose. The swivel fittings and the
adapter fitting shown in the Swivel Fittings and Adapter Fitting parts lists can
be connected to these fittings to allow more hose routing flexibility.

Manifold Port Fitting Part Number O-Ring


Hose Size Description
Thread Size (Includes O-Ring) Part Number
8 mm (5/16 in.),
), 9/
16 in. x 18 threads 972628 Straight fitting
9/ iin. x 18 threads,
h d
16 972647 45-degree
37_ JIC, size 6 swivel fitting
945032
972646 90-degree
swivel fitting

1 2 3

450000003

Figure 11-19 Typical hose fittings


1. Straight fitting 2. 45-degree fitting 3. 90-degree fitting

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-31

Swivel Fittings
See Figure 11-20. These swivel fittings can be used at either the melter end
or the applicator end of a hose.

Swivel Fitting
Hose Size Description
Part Number
8 mm (5/16 in.), 252075 45-degree swivel fitting, 9/16 in. x 18 to 9/16 in. x 18 threads
9/ in
16 in. x 18 threads,
threads 37_
JIC, size 6 972400 90-degree swivel fitting, 9/16 in. x 18 to 9/16 in. x 18 threads

1 2

450000006

Figure 11-20 Typical swivel fittings


1. 45-degree fitting 2. 90-degree fitting

Adapter Fitting
See Figure 11-21. This adapter fitting can be used at either the melter end
or the applicator end of a hose.

Adapter Fitting
Description
Part Number
816164 Adapter, with O-ring part 941161, 9/16 in. x 18 threads (female) to 7/8 in. x 14 threads
(male)

450000004

Figure 11-21 Adapter fitting

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-32 Parts

Splitter and Extension Cables


Splitter cables and extension cables can be used to connect the cordsets on
hoses, applicators, and air heaters to the hose cordset connectors on the
melter. Nordson offers a variety of types and lengths of splitter and
extension cables. Contact your Nordson representative for assistance in
determining what cables are needed for your system.

Splitter Cables
See Figure11-22. These splitter cables can be used to connect the cordsets
on hoses, applicators, and air heaters to the hose cordset connectors on the
melter. In most cases, extension cables will be needed.

Item Part Description


1 310893 Splitter cable, T-style, 2 hose cordsets, 12 in.
2 116998 Splitter cable, T-style, 2 low-power applicator cordsets, 12 in.
3 113543 Splitter cable, T-style, 2 low-power applicator extension cables, 12 in.

690301020

Figure 11-22 Splitter cables

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-33

Extension Cables
See Figures 11-23 and 11-24. These extension cables can be used to
connect splitter cables and/or hose, applicator, or air heater cordsets to the
hose cordset connectors on the melter.

Part Description Note


115576 Extension cable, T-style, hose, 0.61 m (2 ft)
115577 Extension cable, T-style, hose, 1.83 m (6 ft)
115578 Extension cable, T-style, hose, 3.66 m (12 ft)
115579 Extension cable, T-style, hose, 5.49 m (18 ft)
115580 Extension cable, T-style, hose, 7.32 m (24 ft)
115581 Extension cable, T-style, hose, 9.14 m (30 ft)
152812 Extension cable, T-style, hose, 12.19 m (40 ft)
149958 Extension cable, T-style, hose, 15.24 m (50 ft)
117123 Extension cable, T-style, low-power applicator, 1.83 m (6 ft)
164045 Extension cable, T-style, low-power applicator, 3.05 m (10 ft)
108946 Extension cable, T-style, low-power applicator, 4.88 m (16 ft)
135972 Extension cable, T-style, low-power applicator, 7.32 m (24 ft)
753462 Extension cable, T-style, low-power applicator, 9.14 m (30 ft)
754505 Extension cable, T-style, low-power applicator, 10.66 m (35 ft)
756195 Extension cable, T-style, low-power applicator, 12.19 m (40 ft)
150837 Extension cable, T-style, low-power applicator, 15.24 m (50 ft)
152813 Extension cable, T-style, low-power applicator, 18.29 m (60 ft)

690301007

Figure 11-23 Hose extension cable

690301008

Figure 11-24 Low-power applicator extension cable

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-34 Parts

Optional Accessories
To optimize the use of your system, Nordson Corporation recommends
these optional accessories.

Line-Speed Signal Generator


To use the gear-to-line capability of the melter, you must install a device that
measures the speed of the production line. The default type of line-speed
signal input is 0−10 VDC, although other inputs can be accepted. Nordson
Corporation offers the following 0−10 VDC generator.

Part Description Note


119560 Generator, 0−10 VDC, with bracket and cable

Vista Test Plugs


These test plugs simplify the troubleshooting of RTD faults by allowing you
to quickly and easily determine whether a problem is an applicator, hose, or
tank RTD problem or a Vista control system problem.

Part Description Quantity Note


326975 Service kit, test plugs, Vista —
------ S Plug, test, hose/applicator 1
------ S Plug, test, Vista 1

Line Filter
If the melter is affected by electrical noise, install a line filter on each input
power line. Connect the filter line-to-line. For a three-phase system, order
three filters.

Part Description Quantity Note


332182 RC snubber (line filter) 1

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-35

Hydraulic Pressure Gauges


See Figure 11-25. To monitor the hydraulic pressure in the system, install
one of the following hydraulic pressure gauges .

Item Part Description Quantity Note


1 274428 Kit, gauge, hydraulic pressure, inline, 8 mm (5/16 in.) —
2 129830 Kit, gauge, hydraulic pressure, 90-degree, 8 mm —
(5/16 in.)
3 816084 Kit, gauge, hydraulic pressure, 45-degree, 8 mm —
(5/16 in.)

1 2

3
690401013

Figure 11-25 Hydraulic pressure gauges

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-36 Parts

Recommended Spare Parts and Supplies


Tables 11-2 and 11-3 provide part numbers for the replacement parts and
miscellaneous supplies that are most commonly needed to service the
melter. Your decisions about stocking spare parts and supplies depend on
your approach to maintenance. The quantity of each item you stock will vary
depending on the number of hours you operate per day, the number of
melters you have, and the number of major components on each melter.
Base your spare parts stocking decisions on the specific needs of your
operating environment.

Table 11-2 Recommended Spare Parts


Component Part Description
Tank (VL210
( melters)) 104948 Gasket, tank
230127 Harness, wire, thermostat, open-on-rise, 26-in. leads
105721 Harness, wire, RTD
Hopper/reservoir
pp / 1059358 Gasket, top, hopper
(VL215 melters)
l ) 1058990 Cordstock, 3 mm OD, Viton, 75 D
1060250 Cartridge heater, 240 VAC, 1/2 in., 10 in., 500 W
230127 Harness, wire, thermostat, open-on-rise, 26-in. leads
105721 Harness, wire, RTD
Manifold 945037 O-ring, Viton, 1 in. tube (between the manifold and reservoir)
288977 Valve, pressure relief
945034 S O-ring, Viton, 5/16-in. tube
365246 Valve, circulation control
940101 S O-ring, Viton, 0.239 ID x 0.070 W in.
940191 S O-ring, Viton, 0.813 x 0.939 x 0.063 in.
945039 S O-ring, Viton, 3/4-in. tube
147883 Filter assembly, in/out
147884 S Screen, manifold filter, 0.006 in. mesh
941201 S O-ring, Viton, 1.000 x 1.188 x 0.094 in.
271484 Valve, drain
Pump
p 254316 Pump, single-stream, PR 12M1, 1.8 cc/rev/stream
254247 Pump, single-stream, PR 12M2, 3.3 cc/rev/stream
291997 Pump, dual-stream, PU 12-2M1, 1.7 cc/rev/stream
406435 Pump, dual-stream, PU18-2ML, 2.5 cc/rev/stream
253843 S O-ring, 18.0 x 1.5 mm (dual-stream pumps only)
252595 S O-ring, 10.0 x 1.5 mm (all pumps)
253813 S Packing ring (all pumps)
253814 S Bushing (all pumps)
Drive system
y 7109020 Motor, AC gear, 7/8 hp, 230/460 VAC, 3∅, 2480 rpm, 27:1 reduction
779604 Coupling
Continued...

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Parts 11-37

Table 11-2 Recommended Spare Parts (contd)


Component Part Description
Electrical system
y 230260 Service kit, control assembly, Vista
234427 Repair kit, power board, Vista
939491 Fuse, Vista power board, 25 A, VAC (2 required)
310904 Fuse, Vista power board, 1 A, 250 VAC (2 required)
939683 Fuse, Vista power board, 6.3 A, 250 VAC (8 required)
234429 Service kit, control board, Vista
234426 Service kit, display board, Vista
234424 Service kit, firmware, Vista
1046270 Drive, motor, 230 VAC, 1 hp, 3∅
777012 Circuit breaker, 230−440 V, 16 A
777604 Relay, motor drive enable, 24 VDC, DPDT
777603 Fan assembly (VL210 melters)
779895 Filter, control cabinet (VL210 melters)
1060333 Filter, fan, 204 mm (VL215 melters)
1060332 Fan, 240 VAC, 150 cfm (VL215 melters)
Hoses 139672 Repair kit, hose cordset connector

Table 11-3 Recommended Supplies


Part Description Note
900419 Adhesive, retaining, cylindrical (for the circulation control valve set screw)
900464 Adhesive, threadlocking (for the tank lid screws)
900298 Compound, heat-sink, 5 oz tube (for coating RTDs)
900344 Lubricant, Never Seez, 8 oz can (for lubricating straight-thread plugs)
900223 Lubricant, Parker, O-ring, 4 oz (for lubricating O-rings)
900236 Sealant, paste, PTFE (for lubricating tapered-thread plugs)
900413 Sealant, RTV, red, 2.8 oz tube (for the tank or hopper gasket)
931074 Tape, insulation (to secure insulation)
258688 Transmission grease, 500 cc (for filling the reducer)

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


11-38 Parts

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Technical Data 12-1

Section 12
Technical Data

Melter Specifications
Due to technological or quality improvements, specifications are subject to
change without notice.

Item Specification
Electrical service 400 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3∅, Wye (standard) or
208−240 VAC nominal, 50/60 Hz, 3∅, Delta (if converted
using the parts from the voltage conversion kit shipped
with the melter)
System power requirement 15,500 W maximum
Maximum ambient operating temperature +5−40 _C (41−104 _F)
Noise level (see Note A) <70 dB(A)
Approximate weight (empty, including pallet) VL210: 161 kg (355 lb)
VL215: 170 kg (375 lb)
Type of circulation Internal
Adhesive viscosity range 1,000−50,000 cps
Adhesive operating temperature range 65−230 _C (150−450 _F)
Temperature control method Proportional/integral/derivative (PID)
Temperature control stability ±0.5 _C (±1 _F)
Tank capacity VL210: 8.6 kg (19 lb)
VL215: 14.4 kg (31.7 lb)
Melt rate (see Note B) VL210: 7.15 kg/hr (15.75 lb/hr)
VL215: 24.3 kg/hr (53.4 lb/hr)
Motor AC gear motor, 7/8 hp, 0.64 kw, 230/460 VAC, 3∅, 2480
rpm, 27:1 reduction
Pump Single-stream: 1.8 or 3.3 cc/rev/stream
Dual-stream: 1.7 or 2.5 cc/rev/stream
Hoses One to four T-style hoses (nickel RTDs)
NOTE A: The highest corrected, A-weighted, time-averaged emission sound pressure level (SPL) for the melter
was found to be less than 70 dB(A) as measured by EN 31202.
B: The melt rate may vary depending on the form and type of adhesive used.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


12-2 Technical Data

Hose Specifications
Due to technological or quality improvements, specifications are subject to
change without notice.

Item Specification
Type of hose T-style, 8 mm (5/16 in.) ID,
230 VAC, 2−30 ft long
Hose heating and temperature Spirally wound resistive heating
control method element and RTD
Ambient temperature range 0−50 _C (32−120 _F)
Maximum operating temperature 230 _C (450 _F)
Temperate control accuracy 0.5 _C (± 1 _F)
Maximum working hydraulic 103 bar (1,500 psi)
pressure

Torque Specifications
These torque specifications are also stated within the appropriate repair
procedures.

Component Torque Specification


Hopper-to-reservoir bolts 7−8 NSm (60−72 in.-lb)
Manifold fittings (hose fittings or 9–10 NSm (80−88 in.-lb)
hose port plugs)
Pump mounting screws 25 NSm (222 in.-lb)
All Vista control assembly board 1.0−1.4 NSm (10−12 in.-lb)
securing screws
Q17 triac screw on the Vista power 0.8−0.9 NSm (7−8 in.-lb)
board
Q17 triac clamp screws on the 1.0−1.4 NSm (10−12 in.-lb)
Vista power board

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Technical Data 12-3

Dimensions

350 mm
(13.78 in.)

13 mm dia.
504 mm (0.51 in.)
(19.84 in.)

730 mm
(28.74 in.)

See
note

684 mm 406 mm
(26.93 in.) (16.0 in.)

Figure 12-1 Melter dimensions


Note: On VL210 melters, this dimension is 440 mm (17.3 in.). On VL215 melters, this dimension is 611 mm (24 in.).

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


12-4 Technical Data

Electrical Schematics and Wiring Diagrams


The following electrical schematics and wiring diagrams are provided for
your reference as needed.

Hose and Applicator Cordset Wiring Diagrams


These wiring diagrams are for the hose and applicator cordsets that can be
used with the melter. All cordsets have a T-style connector.

1 APPLICATOR HEATER

APPLICATOR HEATER
2
APPLICATOR RTD
3
HOSE HEATER
4
HOSE/APPLICATOR RTD
5
HOSE HEATER
6
GROUND

HOSE RTD
8

1 2 3 4 9

5 6 8 10

9 10 11 12 11

12
690302047

Figure 12-2 Hose cordset

1 HEATER
2 1 2 HEATER
3 RTD
4 3 4

5 5 RTD
GROUND 690302015

Figure 12-3 Low-power applicator cordset

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Technical Data 12-5

Splitter Cable Wiring Diagrams


These wiring diagrams are for the splitter cables that can be used with the
melter. All cables have a T-style cordset.

4
8 6 5

1 2 3 4
5 6 8

4
8 6 5

HOSE/APPLICATOR HEATER HOSE HEATER


1 6
HOSE/APPLICATOR HEATER HOSE HEATER
2 4
HOSE RTD HOSE RTD
3 8

12
HOSE/APPLICATOR RTD HOSE RTD
5 5
GROUND
9 GROUND A
GROUND
GROUND B GROUND
11
HOSE RTD HOSE RTD
8 8
HOSE HEATER HOSE HEATER 4
4
HOSE RTD
10 5

6 HOSE HEATER HOSE HEATER


6
690302024

Figure 12-4 Splitter cable for two hoses


Note: The control system will display the hose plugged into one of these connectors as an applicator zone.
Note: For the splitter cable part number, refer to Splitter and Extension Cables in Section 11, Parts.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


12-6 Technical Data

Splitter Cable Wiring Diagrams (contd)

5
4 3

2 1
1 2 3 4
5 6 8
9 11 12
5
4 3

2 1

APPLICATOR HEATER
11 1
APPLICATOR RTD
9 3
APPLICATOR RTD
12 5
APPLICATOR HEATER GROUND
1
APPLICATOR RTD APPLICATOR HEATER
3 2
HOSE/APPLICATOR HEATER
4
HOSE/APPLICATOR RTD APPLICATOR HEATER
5 1
HOSE/APPLICATOR HEATER APPLICATOR RTD
6 5
GROUND APPLICATOR HEATER
2
HOSE/APPLICATOR RTD GROUND
8
APPLICATOR HEATER APPLICATOR RTD
2 3
690302019

Figure 12-5 Splitter cable for two low-power applicator cordsets


Note: The control system will display the applicator plugged into the HG connector as a hose zone.
Note: For the splitter cable part number, refer to Splitter and Extension Cables in Section 11, Parts.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Technical Data 12-7

3 2 1
5

1 2 3 4
5 6 8
9 11 12

3 2 1
5

APPLICATOR HEATER 1
11
APPLICATOR RTD 3
9 APPLICATOR RTD 5
12 GROUND
1 APPLICATOR HEATER
APPLICATOR HEATER 2
3 APPLICATOR RTD
4 HOSE/APPLICATOR HEATER
HOSE/APPLICATOR RTD APPLICATOR HEATER 1
5
HOSE/APPLICATOR HEATER APPLICATOR RTD 5
6
APPLICATOR HEATER 2
GROUND
GROUND
8 HOSE/APPLICATOR RTD
APPLICATOR RTD 3
2 APPLICATOR HEATER

690302020

Figure 12-6 Splitter cable for two low-power applicator extension cables
Note: The control system will display the applicator plugged into the HG connector as a hose zone.
Note: For the splitter cable part number, refer to Splitter and Extension Cables in Section 11, Parts.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


12-8 Technical Data

Extension Cable Wiring Diagrams


The following wiring diagrams show the extension cables that can be used
with the melter. All cables have a T-style cordset.

1 APPLICATOR HEATER

APPLICATOR HEATER
1 2 3 4 2 4 3 2 1
5 6 8 APPLICATOR RTD 8 6 5
3 12 11 10 9
9 10 11 12
HOSE HEATER
4
HOSE/APPLICATOR RTD
5
HOSE HEATER
6
GROUND

8 HOSE RTD

10

11

12
690302048

Figure 12-7 Hose extension cable


Note: For extension cable part numbers, refer to Splitter and Extension Cables in Section 11, Parts.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


Technical Data 12-9

APPLICATOR HEATER 5
1 APPLICATOR HEATER 1
1 2 3 APPLICATOR HEATER
APPLICATOR HEATER 2
5 2 APPLICATOR RTD 4 3
APPLICATOR RTD 3
3 APPLICATOR RTD
5
4 GROUND 2 1
HOSE/APPLICATOR RTD
5 4
6
GROUND

10

11

12
690302022

Figure 12-8 Low-power applicator extension cable


Note: For extension cable part numbers, refer to Splitter and Extension Cables in Section 11, Parts.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C


12-10 Technical Data

This page intentionally left blank.

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


VL210 Melter Schematics
MAIN DISCONNECT
63A
−1Q21

1 2 −XL5 1 JUMPER BAR 1


L1 1 to 3−1
3 4 −XL6 2 JUMPER BAR 2
L2 1 to 3−1

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


5 6 −XL7 3 JUMPER BAR 3
L3 1 to 3−1
−XL8 4 JUMPER BAR 4
N 1 to 3−1

20
GND

−1A31 FAN
L1
VISTA POWER BOARD +FAN N

GND
PE −XE12

XT2:1
−1M82

TB1:A
TB1:B
1

TB1:C
TB1:D
PE
L1 L2 L3 N GND
52

CHASSIS

to 7−3 to 6−3
TANK

HOSE1_HTR+
GUN1_HTR+
HOSE2_HTR+
GUN2_HTR+
HOSE3_HTR+
GUN3_HTR+
HOSE4_HTR+
GUN4_HTR+
HOSE1_HTR−
GUN1_HTR−
HOSE2_HTR−
GUN2_HTR−
HOSE3_HTR−
GUN3_HTR−
HOSE4_HTR−
GUN4_HTR−
SOLENOID−
SOLENOID+
WARNING−
FAULT+
FAULT−
READY+
READY−

20 20 HEATER THERMOSTAT INPUTS

XS1
J2:1
J9:1

XS2
XS3
XS4

X1:1
X2:1
J2:2
J2:3
J9:2

J2:4

X1:2
X1:3
X1:4
X1:5
X1:6
X1:7
X1:8
X2:2
X2:3
X2:4
X2:5
X2:6
X2:7
X2:8
TB2:1 WARNING+
TB2:2
TB2:3
TB2:4
TB2:5
TB2:6

89

85
86
87
88
90

PARENT MACHINE INTERFACE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 1 2


−XM TERMINAL BLOCK ASSIGNMENTS
+H4HG +H4HG +H4HG +H4HG 7 8 9 10 11 12 −XM
X1 X2 J2 J9
POS. FUNCTION

1
1

2
2

4
6

31
−1X71
61

11
29

22
28
20
33
37
38

24
62

19

13
10
15
1 0−10 V SIGNAL
+H6HG NORDSON(USES PINS 939916)
XS3M 933321
2 0−10 V COMMON
3 40 40 14
MOTOR 1 START/STOP 3 3 MOTOR DRIVE

to 4−2
to 4−5
to 4−2
to 4−4
to 3−1
to 3−1
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED 39 39 −1K81 ENABLE RELAY
4
CONTACT 1 1 13

4
1
13 to 5−2
10 to 5−5
22 to 6−2
19 to 6−5
31 to 7−2
28 to 7−5
6
2
15 to 5−2
11 to 5−4
24 to 6−2
20 to 6−4
33 to 7−2
29 to 7−4
1
2
61 to 3−5
62 to 3−5
37 to 3−3
38 to 3−3

5 RESERVED NO 8−4
NC
6
7 SYSTEM WARNING
8
9 SYSTEM FAULT
10
11 SYSTEM READY
12

Figure 12-9 Vista power board

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-11
E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C
+H4HG
XP2
CONNECTOR
HARNESS RTD

Figure 12-10
−2A11

9
9 to 4−3 XP2:1 HOSE1_IN+
1

8
8 to 4−4 XP2:2 HOSE1_IN−
2

18
18 to 5−3 XP2:3 HOSE2_IN+
3

17
17 to 5−4 XP2:4 HOSE2_IN−
4

27
27 to 6−3 XP2:5 HOSE3_IN+
5

26
26 to 6−4 XP2:6 HOSE3_IN−
6

36
36 to 7−3 XP2:7 HOSE4_IN+
7
VISTA MICROCONTROLLER BOARD

35
VL210 Melter Schematics

Vista microcontroller board

35 to 7−4 XP2:8 HOSE4_IN−


8

3
3 to 4−6 XP2:9 GUN1_IN+
9

5
5 to 4−6 XP2:10 GUN1_IN−
10
(contd)

12
12 to 5−6 XP2:11 GUN2_IN+
11

14
14 to 5−6 XP2:12 GUN2_IN−
12

21
21 to 6−6 XP2:13 GUN3_IN+
13

23
23 to 6−6 XP2:14 GUN3_IN−
14

30
30 to 7−6 XP2:15 GUN4_IN+
15

32
32 to 7−6 XP2:16 GUN4_IN−
16

XP2:17 HOSE_OUT5
17

XP2:18 GUN_OUT5
18

XP2:19 HOSE_OUT6
19

XP2:20 GUN_OUT6
20

XP2:21 GRID_OUT
21

XP2:22 TANK_OUT
22

XP2:23 DGND
23

XP2:24 CARD_OPRTD
24

XP2:25 GUN5_IN+
25

XP2:26 GUN5_IN−
26

XP2:27 GUN6_IN+
27

XP2:28 GUN6_IN−
28

XP2:29 HOSE5_IN+
29
30 XP2:30 HOSE5_IN−
XP2:31 HOSE6_IN+

31
XP2:32 HOSE6_IN−

32
41
41 to 3−2 XP2:33 TANK_IN+

33
42
42 to 3−2 XP2:34 TANK_IN−

34
XP2:35 GRID_IN+

35
XP2:36 GRID_IN−

36
XP7:1 COMMON
XP8:1 COMMON
XP9:1 COMMON
XP10:1 COMMON
12-12 Technical Data
1 1 −XL5
from 1−8 2 to 8−11
2 2 −XL6
from 1−8 2
3 3 −XL7
from 1−8 2
4 4 −XL8
from 1−8 2 to 8−14
NOTE: THIS JUMPER FOR 240 VAC UNITS ONLY. DO NOT USE ON 400V UNITS.

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


1 2
+H6HG
J1C

62
1 2 41 42 37 38

61
from 1−5 from 1−5 from 2−5 from 2−6 from 1−6 from 1−6

41 42 37 38

+H4HG 1 2 +H4HG 1 2
RES RTD CONN TSTAT CONN

61 from 1−5
62 from 1−5
1

2 +H4HG +H4HG
RES RTD 1 2 TSTAT 1 2

+HYD +HYD +HYD


−3E11 −3B21
−3S31
RESERVOIR
HEATER
Ni 120 RESERVOIR
RESERVOIR RTD THERMOSTAT

UNIT RESERVOIR HEATER

VL230 2800W@230V
17.09 − 19.94 OHMS
VL215 1900W@230V
25.19 − 29.39 OHMS
VL210 2800W@230V
17.09 − 19.94 OHMS

Figure 12-11 Internal zones

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-13
VL210 Melter Schematics (contd)

6 4 16 9 8 2 1 3 5
from 1−4 from 1−2 from 5−3 from 2−1 from 2−2 from 1−4 from 1−3 from 2−2 from 2−3

Part 779639C
16
12-14 Technical Data

6 4 9 8 2 1 3 5
1
−XE43

7
+H4HG
HC1 6 4 7 11 9 2 1 3 5
HOSE/GUN 1
CONNECTOR

+EXT +EXT
+EXT −4B41 +EXT −4B61
−4E21 −4E51

HOSE 1 HEATER GUN 1 HEATER


HOSE 1 RTD GUN 1 RTD
NI 120 NI 120

NOTE: TOTAL HOSE/GUN PAIR WATTAGE NOT TO EXCEED 1200 WATTS

Figure 12-12 Hose/gun 1

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


15 13 16 18 17 11 10 12 14
from 1−4 from 1−3 to 4−3 from 2−2 from 2−2 from 1−4 from 1−3 from 2−3 from 2−3

16

15 13 18 17 11 10 12 14

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


+H4HG
HC2 6 4 7 11 9 2 1 3 5
HOSE/GUN 2
CONNECTOR

+EXT +EXT
+EXT −5B41 +EXT −5B61
−5E21 −5E51

HOSE 2 HEATER GUN 2 HEATER


HOSE 2 RTD GUN 2 RTD
NI 120 NI 120

NOTE: TOTAL HOSE/GUN PAIR WATTAGE NOT TO EXCEED 1200 WATTS

Figure 12-13 Hose/gun 2

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-15
VL210 Melter Schematics (contd)

24 22 20 27 26 20 19 21 23
from 1−4 from 1−3 from 1−2 from 2−2 from 2−2 from 1−4 from 1−3 from 2−3 from 2−3

Part 779639C
24 22 20 27 26 20 19 21 23
12-16 Technical Data

+H4HG
HC3 6 4 7 11 9 2 1 3 5
HOSE/GUN 3
CONNECTOR

+EXT +EXT
+EXT −6B41 +EXT −6B61
−6E21 −6E51

HOSE 3 HEATER GUN 3 HEATER


HOSE 3 RTD GUN 3 RTD
NI 120 NI 120

NOTE: TOTAL HOSE/GUN PAIR WATTAGE NOT TO EXCEED 1200 WATTS

Figure 12-14 Hose/gun 3

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


33 31 20 36 35 29 28 30 32
from 1−4 from 1−3 from 1−2 from 2−2 from 2−2 from 1−4 from 1−3 from 2−3 from 2−3

33 31 20 36 35 29 28 30 32

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


+H4HG
HC4 6 4 7 11 9 2 1 3 5
HOSE/GUN 4
CONNECTOR

+EXT +EXT
+EXT −7B41 +EXT −7B61
−7E21 −7E51

HOSE 4 HEATER GUN 4 HEATER


HOSE 4 RTD GUN 4 RTD
NI 120 NI 120

NOTE: TOTAL HOSE/GUN PAIR WATTAGE NOT TO EXCEED 1200 WATTS

Figure 12-15 Hose/gun 4

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-17
VL210 Melter Schematics (contd)

1 1
from 3−8

Part 779639C
4 4
from 3−8

−8Q31 −8Q32
16A/500V 16A/500V 1
12-18 Technical Data

1 1
48
2 43 3
−XM
MOTOR 1 −8R31
AUTO/MANUAL 2 2 −8S51
MOTOR 1 3 MOTOR 1 CUSTOMER
−8S21 44 45 SPEED POT −1K81 START/STOP SUPPLIED
47 MOTOR DRIVE
+ 1 46 5K OHMS CONTACT
ENABLE
1 RELAY
−XM
9 1−8
G 50 5
25 53 49
− 2 4
−XM −8A31 −XM

1
9

2
3
5
6
7
8

4
11
0−10 V SIEMENS

L3
10
12
13

L/L1
SIGNAL

N/L2
6SE6440−2AB17−5AA1
GENERATOR 187−264VAC/3.9A

0V
1 HP

DIN1
DIN2
DIN3
DIN4

+10V
+15V

AIN1−

AIN1+
AOUT−

AOUT+

AIN2/PID−

AIN2/PID+

RL1
RL2
51

RS485
PE

MOTOR PTC
MOTOR PTC
DIN5
DIN6
PE
N−
P+
+5V
D1GND1

U
V
W
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
PU

WHT
WHT
GRN−YEL
BROWN
BLUE
BLACK
28 20 PE U W V −8W21
MOTOR CABLE

+MTR1 2
−8S11 1 3
0.86 HP
MOTOR 1 PE PE
THERMOSTAT
+MTR1
−8M21
230VAC
MOTOR 1 2480 RPM

Figure 12-16 Motor control 1

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


DRIVE DIP SWITCH SETTINGS DRIVE PARAMETER SETTINGS TABLE

ON CONTROL DRIVE PARAMETERS SETTING PROCEDURE


PR. SETTING DESCRIPTION
BOARD
1. SET DIP SWITCHES AS SHOWN.
P0003 2 EXTENDED USER ACCESS LEVEL
ON I/O 2. PERFORM QUICK COMMISIONING BY SETTING PARAMETERS P0003 THROUGH P3900 PER THE
P0010 1 START QUICK COMMISIONING SETTINGS SHOWN IN THE TABLE. INDEXED PARAMETERS WILL SHOW ”in000” IN THE KEYPAD DISPLAY.
BOARD
PRESS THE ”P” BUTTON TO SELECT THE PARAMETER AND ENTER ITS VALUE. USE THE ”Fn” KEY TO
P0100 0 CHECK/SET FREQUENCY SETTING (50/60 Hz) ADJUST EACH DIGIT INDIVIDUALLY IF NECESSARY.

P0300 1 MOTOR TYPE 3. ONCE THE VALUE FOR P3900 IS ENTERED, THE DRIVE WILL PERFORM SOME CALCULATIONS. THIS

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


MAY TAKE 1−2 MINUTES. THE DISPLAY WILL INDICATE THAT THE DRIVE IS BUSY.
P0304 230 MOTOR VOLTAGE (VAC)
4. TURN THE START/STOP SWITCH ON THE VL300 PANEL TO THE START POSITION. THE DRIVE WILL
P0305 3.60 MOTOR CURRENT (A) SEND A PULSE CURRENT THROUGH THE MOTOR TO DETERMINE STATOR RESISTANCE AND OTHER
PARAMETERS. THIS MAY TAKE A FEW MINUTES. SOME HIGH PITCHED SOUNDS MAY BE HEARD WHILE
P0307 0.64 MOTOR POWER (kW)
THE DRIVE IS PULSING THE MOTOR. THE DISPLAY WILL SHOW ”BUSY” AFTER A FEW SECONDS OF
PULSING.
P0308 0.59 MOTOR POWER FACTOR
5. ONCE THE DRIVE IS FINISHED PERFORMING CALCULATIONS, FINISH ENTERING VALUES FOR P1310
P0310 87 MOTOR FREQUENCY (Hz) AND P2000.
P0311 2480 MOTOR SPEED (RPM)
6. TURN THE MOTOR START SWITCH OFF.
P0335 0 MOTOR COOLING METHOD
7. GO TO PARAMETER r0000 AND PRESS ”P” TO EXIT THE PARAMETER SETTING MODE. THE PROCEDURE
P0640 150 MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR (%) IS NOW COMPLETE.

P0700 2 START/STOP COMMAND SOURCE

P1000 2 FREQUENCY SETPOINT SOURCE

P1080 0 MINIMUM FREQUENCY (Hz)

P1082 87 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY (Hz)

P1120 1 RAMP−UP TIME (sec)

P1121 1 RAMP−DOWN TIME (sec)

P1135 5 OFF 3 RAMP−DOWN TIME (sec)

P1300 0 CONTROL MODE

P1500 0 TORQUE SETPOINT

P1910 1 MOTOR DATA IDENTIFICATION

P3900 2 END QUICK COMMISIONING

P1310 5 CONTINUOUS BOOST (%)

P2000 87 REFERENCE FREQUENCY (Hz)

Figure 12-17 Drive parameter setting procedure (Brook Hansen motor)

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-19
VL210 Melter Schematics (contd)

DRIVE DIP SWITCH SETTINGS DRIVE PARAMETER SETTINGS TABLE

DRIVE PARAMETERS SETTING PROCEDURE

Part 779639C
ON CONTROL
PR. SETTING DESCRIPTION
BOARD
1. SET DIP SWITCHES AS SHOWN.
P0003 2 EXTENDED USER ACCESS LEVEL
ON I/O 2. PERFORM QUICK COMMISIONING BY SETTING PARAMETERS P0003 THROUGH P3900 PER THE
P0010 1 START QUICK COMMISIONING SETTINGS SHOWN IN THE TABLE. INDEXED PARAMETERS WILL SHOW ”in000” IN THE KEYPAD DISPLAY.
BOARD
PRESS THE ”P” BUTTON TO SELECT THE PARAMETER AND ENTER ITS VALUE. USE THE ”Fn” KEY TO
P0100 0 CHECK/SET FREQUENCY SETTING (50/60 Hz) ADJUST EACH DIGIT INDIVIDUALLY IF NECESSARY.
12-20 Technical Data

P0300 1 MOTOR TYPE 3. ONCE THE VALUE FOR P3900 IS ENTERED, THE DRIVE WILL PERFORM SOME CALCULATIONS. THIS
MAY TAKE 1−2 MINUTES. THE DISPLAY WILL INDICATE THAT THE DRIVE IS BUSY.
P0304 220 MOTOR VOLTAGE (VAC)
4. TURN THE START/STOP SWITCH ON THE VL300 PANEL TO THE START POSITION. THE DRIVE WILL
P0305 1.98 MOTOR CURRENT (A)
SEND A PULSE CURRENT THROUGH THE MOTOR TO DETERMINE STATOR RESISTANCE AND OTHER
MOTOR POWER (kW) PARAMETERS. THIS MAY TAKE A FEW MINUTES. SOME HIGH PITCHED SOUNDS MAY BE HEARD WHILE
P0307 0.37 THE DRIVE IS PULSING THE MOTOR. THE DISPLAY WILL SHOW ”BUSY” AFTER A FEW SECONDS OF
MOTOR POWER FACTOR PULSING.
P0308 0.74
50 MOTOR FREQUENCY (Hz) 5. ONCE THE DRIVE IS FINISHED PERFORMING CALCULATIONS, FINISH ENTERING VALUES FOR P1310
P0310 AND P2000.
P0311 1380 MOTOR SPEED (RPM)
6. TURN THE MOTOR START SWITCH OFF.
P0335 0 MOTOR COOLING METHOD
7. GO TO PARAMETER r0000 AND PRESS ”P” TO EXIT THE PARAMETER SETTING MODE. THE PROCEDURE
P0640 150 MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR (%) IS NOW COMPLETE.
P0700 2 START/STOP COMMAND SOURCE

P1000 2 FREQUENCY SETPOINT SOURCE

P1080 0 MINIMUM FREQUENCY (Hz)

P1082 50 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY (Hz)

P1120 1 RAMP−UP TIME (sec)

P1121 1 RAMP−DOWN TIME (sec)

P1135 5 OFF 3 RAMP−DOWN TIME (sec)

P1300 0 CONTROL MODE

P1500 0 TORQUE SETPOINT

P1910 1 MOTOR DATA IDENTIFICATION

P3900 2 END QUICK COMMISIONING

P0776 1 TYPE OF DAC

P1310 5 CONTINUOUS BOOST (%)

P2000 50 REFERENCE FREQUENCY (Hz)

Figure 12-18 Drive parameter setting procedure (SEW Eurodrive motor)

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


VL215 Melter Electrical Schematics

MAIN DISCONNECT
63A
−1Q21

1 2 −XL5 1 JUMPER BAR 1


L1 1 to 3−1
3 4 −XL6 2 JUMPER BAR 2
L2 1 to 3−1

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


5 6 −XL7 3 JUMPER BAR 3
L3 1 to 3−1
−XL8 4 JUMPER BAR 4
N 1 to 3−1

20
GND
FAN
−1A31 L1
VISTA POWER BOARD +FAN N

GND
PE −XE12

XT2:1
−1M82

TB1:A
TB1:B
1

TB1:C
TB1:D
PE
L1 L2 L3 N GND 65
65

to 1−1
65
from 1−8
to 7−3 to 6−3
65 TANK

HOSE1_HTR+
GUN1_HTR+
HOSE2_HTR+
GUN2_HTR+
HOSE3_HTR+
GUN3_HTR+
HOSE4_HTR+
GUN4_HTR+
HOSE1_HTR−
GUN1_HTR−
HOSE2_HTR−
GUN2_HTR−
HOSE3_HTR−
GUN3_HTR−
HOSE4_HTR−
GUN4_HTR−
SOLENOID−
SOLENOID+
WARNING−
FAULT+
FAULT−
READY+
READY−

20 20 HEATER THERMOSTAT INPUTS


PARENT MACHINE INTERFACE

XS1
J2:1
J9:1

XS2
XS3
XS4
−XM TERMINAL BLOCK ASSIGNMENTS

X1:1
X2:1
J2:2
J2:3
J9:2

J2:4

X1:2
X1:3
X1:5
X1:6
X1:7
X1:8
X2:2
X2:3
X2:5
X2:6
X2:7
X2:8

X1:4
X2:4
TB2:1 WARNING+
TB2:2
TB2:3
TB2:4
TB2:5
TB2:6

POS. FUNCTION
89

85
86
87
88
90

1 0−10 V SIGNAL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 1 2
2 0−10 V COMMON
+H6HG +H6HG +H6HG +H6HG 7 8 9 10 11 12 −XM
X1 X2 J2 J9
3 MOTOR 1 START
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED

1
1

2
2

4
6

31
61
−1X71

11
40

29
4

22
28
20
33
37
38

24
62

19

13
10
15
CONTACT to 10−3
+H6HG NORDSON(USES PINS 939916)
5 MOTOR 2 START
XS3M 933321
6 CUSTOMER SUPPLIED 14 −1K81
CONTACT 40 40
3 3 −1V81 MOTOR DRIVE

to 4−2
to 4−5
to 4−2
to 4−4
to 14−1
7 SYSTEM WARNING to 14−1 39 39 1N4001 ENABLE RELAY
1 1

4
1
13 to 5−2
10 to 5−5
22 to 6−2
19 to 6−5
31 to 7−2
28 to 7−5
6
2
15 to 5−2
11 to 5−4
24 to 6−2
20 to 6−4
33 to 7−2
29 to 7−4
1
2
61 to 3−5
62 to 3−5
37 to 3−3
38 to 3−3

8 13 NO 10−1,11−1
39 NC
9 to 10−5
SYSTEM FAULT
10
11 SYSTEM READY
12
13 MOTOR 1 STOP
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
14 CONTACT
15 MOTOR 2 STOP
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
16 CONTACT

Figure 12-19 Vista power board

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-21
E 2005 Nordson Corporation Part 779639C
+HEXPWGR
+HEXPWGR

XP2A
XP2B

+H6HG
XP2
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR

HARNESS RTD
HARNESS RTD
HARNESS RTD

Figure 12-20
−2A11

9 1
9 to 4−3 XP2:1 HOSE1_IN+
1
1
1

8 2
8 to 4−4 XP2:2 HOSE1_IN−
2
2
2

18 3
18 to 5−3 XP2:3 HOSE2_IN+
3
3
3

17 4
17 to 5−4 XP2:4 HOSE2_IN−
4
4
4

27 5
27 to 6−3 XP2:5 HOSE3_IN+
5
5
5

26 6
26 to 6−4 XP2:6 HOSE3_IN−
6
6
6

36 7
36 to 7−3 XP2:7 HOSE4_IN+
7
7
7
VISTA MICROCONTROLLER BOARD

35 8
Vista microcontroller board

35 to 7−4 XP2:8 HOSE4_IN−


8
8
8

3 9
3 to 4−6 XP2:9 GUN1_IN+
9
9
9

5 10
5 to 4−6 XP2:10 GUN1_IN−
10
10
10

12 11
12 to 5−6 XP2:11 GUN2_IN+
11
11
11

14 12
14 to 5−6 XP2:12 GUN2_IN−
12
12
12
VL215 Melter Electrical Schematics

21 13
21 to 6−6 XP2:13 GUN3_IN+
13
13
13

23 14
23 to 6−6 XP2:14 GUN3_IN−
14
14
14

30 15
30 to 7−6 XP2:15 GUN4_IN+
(contd)

15
15
15

32 16
32 to 7−6 XP2:16 GUN4_IN−
16
16
16

17
to 8−3 XP2:17 HOSE_OUT5
17
17
17

18
to 8−3 XP2:18 GUN_OUT5
18
18
18

19
to 8−3 XP2:19 HOSE_OUT6
19
19
19

20
to 8−3 XP2:20 GUN_OUT6
20
20
20

XP2:21 GRID_OUT
21
21
21

XP2:22 TANK_OUT
22
22
22

22
to 8−3 XP2:23 DGND
23
23
23

XP2:24 CARD_OPRTD

24
24
24

45 25
45 to 8−6 XP2:25 GUN5_IN+

25
25
25

47 26
47 to 8−6 XP2:26 GUN5_IN−

26
26
26

54 27
54 to 9−6 XP2:27 GUN6_IN+

27
27
27

56 28
56 to 9−6 XP2:28 GUN6_IN−

28
28
28

51 29
51 to 8−3 XP2:29 HOSE5_IN+

29
29
29
50 30
50 to 8−4 XP2:30 HOSE5_IN−

30
30
30
60 31
60 to 9−3 XP2:31 HOSE6_IN+

31
31
31
59 32
59 to 9−4 XP2:32 HOSE6_IN−

32
32
32
41 33
41 to 3−2 XP2:33 TANK_IN+

33
33
33
42 34
42 to 3−2 XP2:34 TANK_IN−

34
34
34
XP2:35 GRID_IN+

35
35
35
XP2:36 GRID_IN−

36
36
36
COMMON

36
XP7:1
XP8:1 COMMON
XP9:1 COMMON
XP10:1 COMMON
12-22 Technical Data
1 4
to 1−2 to 1−2
1 1 −XL5 JUMPER−BAR
from 1−8 2 to 10−1
1
2 2 −XL6 JUMPER−BAR
from 1−8 2
3 3 −XL7 JUMPER−BAR
from 1−8 2
4 4 −XL8 JUMPER−BAR
from 1−8 2 to 10−1
4

+BDCONT NOTE: THIS JUMPER FOR 240 VAC UNITS ONLY. DO NOT USE ON 400V UNITS.
−3A41

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


N
VISTA CONTACTOR BOARD

L1
L2
L3

XS1A
XS2A
XS3A
XS4A
J1C:1
J2C:1

XS2B
XS3B
XS3C
XS3D
XS4B
XS4C
J1C:2
J2C:2
68
1 2
+H6HG
J1C

2
61
62
41 42 37 38
from 2−5 from 2−6 from 1−6 from 1−6
41 42 37 38

to 8−4
to 8−4
+H6HG 1 2 +H6HG 1 2

2
1
RES RTD TSTAT

61 from 1−5
62 from 1−5
+HYD +HYD
RES RTD 1 2 TSTAT 1 2

+HYD +HYD
−3B21
−3S31

Ni 120 RESERVOIR
RESERVOIR RTD THERMOSTAT

Figure 12-21 Internal zones

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-23
VL215 Melter Electrical Schematics (contd)

6 4 16 9 8 2 1 3 5
from 1−4 from 1−2 from 5−3 from 2−1 from 2−2 from 1−4 from 1−3 from 2−2 from 2−3

Part 779639C
16

6 4 9 8 2 1 3 5
12-24 Technical Data

1
−XE43

7
+H6HG
HC1 6 4 7 11 9 2 1 3 5
HOSE/GUN 1
CONNECTOR

+EXT +EXT
+EXT −4B41 +EXT −4B61
−4E21 −4E51

HOSE 1 HEATER GUN 1 HEATER


HOSE 1 RTD GUN 1 RTD
NI 120 NI 120

NOTE: TOTAL HOSE/GUN PAIR WATTAGE NOT TO EXCEED 1200 WATTS

Figure 12-22 Hose/gun 1

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


15 13 16 18 17 11 10 12 14
from 1−4 from 1−3 to 4−3 from 2−2 from 2−2 from 1−4 from 1−3 from 2−3 from 2−3

15 13 16 18 17 11 10 12 14

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


+H6HG
HC2 6 4 7 11 9 2 1 3 5
HOSE/GUN 2
CONNECTOR

+EXT +EXT
+EXT −5B41 +EXT −5B61
−5E21 −5E51

HOSE 2 HEATER GUN 2 HEATER


HOSE 2 RTD GUN 2 RTD
NI 120 NI 120

NOTE: TOTAL HOSE/GUN PAIR WATTAGE NOT TO EXCEED 1200 WATTS

Figure 12-23 Hose/gun 2

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-25
VL215 Melter Electrical Schematics (contd)

24 22 20 27 26 20 19 21 23
from 1−4 from 1−3 from 1−2 from 2−2 from 2−2 from 1−4 from 1−3 from 2−3 from 2−3

Part 779639C
24 22 20 27 26 20 19 21 23
12-26 Technical Data

+H6HG
HC3 6 4 7 11 9 2 1 3 5
HOSE/GUN 3
CONNECTOR

+EXT +EXT
+EXT −6B41 +EXT −6B61
−6E21 −6E51

HOSE 3 HEATER GUN 3 HEATER


HOSE 3 RTD GUN 3 RTD
NI 120 NI 120

NOTE: TOTAL HOSE/GUN PAIR WATTAGE NOT TO EXCEED 1200 WATTS

Figure 12-24 Hose/gun 3

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


33 31 20 36 35 29 28 30 32
from 1−4 from 1−3 from 1−2 from 2−2 from 2−2 from 1−4 from 1−3 from 2−3 from 2−3

33 31 20 36 35 29 28 30 32

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


+H6HG
HC4 6 4 7 11 9 2 1 3 5
HOSE/GUN 4
CONNECTOR

+EXT +EXT
+EXT −7B41 +EXT −7B61
−7E21 −7E51

HOSE 4 HEATER GUN 4 HEATER


HOSE 4 RTD GUN 4 RTD
NI 120 NI 120

NOTE: TOTAL HOSE/GUN PAIR WATTAGE NOT TO EXCEED 1200 WATTS

Figure 12-25 Hose/gun 4

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-27
VL215 Melter Electrical Schematics (contd)

19
20
22
18
17
1
2

Part 779639C
from 2−4
from 2−4
from 2−4
from 2−4
from 2−3
from 3−5
from 3−4

19
20
22
18
17
1
2
+HEXPWGR
12-28 Technical Data

X3H 1 2 3 4 5

−8A31

VISTA HOSE/GUN 5&6 BOARD

XS1H
XS2H

X3H:1
X3H:2
X3H:3
X3H:4
X3H:5

X1H:1
X1H:2
X1H:3
X1H:4
X2H:1
X2H:2
X2H:3
X2H:4
57 57 53 53
to 9−2 to 9−4
52 52 55 55
to 9−5 to 9−2
58 58
−XE83 from 9−3
1 51 50 45 47
from 2−5 from 2−5 from 2−4 from 2−5
49 51 50 45 47
48 46 HOSE 5 44 43 GUN 5
+H6HG
HC5 6 4 7 11 9 2 1 3 5
HOSE/GUN 5
CONNECTOR

+EXT +EXT +EXT +EXT


−8B41 −8B61
−8E21 −8E51

HOSE 5 HEATER GUN 5 HEATER


HOSE 5 RTD GUN 5 RTD
NI 120 NI 120

NOTE: TOTAL HOSE/GUN PAIR WATTAGE NOT TO EXCEED 1200 WATTS

Figure 12-26 Hose/gun 5

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


57 55 58 60 59 53 52 54 56
from 8−3 from 8−4 to 8−5 from 2−5 from 2−5 from 8−4 from 8−3 from 2−5 from 2−5

57 55 58 60 59 53 52 54 56

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


+H6HG
HC6 6 4 7 11 9 2 1 3 5
HOSE/GUN 6
CONNECTOR

+EXT +EXT
+EXT −9B41 +EXT −9B61
−9E21 −9E51

HOSE 6 HEATER GUN 6 HEATER


HOSE 6 RTD GUN 6 RTD
NI 120 NI 120

NOTE: TOTAL HOSE/GUN PAIR WATTAGE NOT TO EXCEED 1200 WATTS

Figure 12-27 Hose/gun 6

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-29
VL215 Melter Electrical Schematics (contd)

1 1 JUMPER−BAR −XL5 14AWG/BLACK 1


from 3−8 3 to 11−1
4 4 JUMPER−BAR −XL8 14AWG/BLACK 4

Part 779639C
from 3−8 3 to 11−1

−1K81
63 −10K31
1−8
91 MOTOR DRIVE 10−3
to 11−1 1 ENABLE RELAY MOTOR 1

−10Q31
−10Q32
1 1 1 RELEASE
16A/440V 2 64
12-30 Technical Data

9 4
72 5 74 12
MOTOR 1 −10R31 8
AUTO/MANUAL 2
2 MOTOR 1
−10S41 3
91 SPEED POT
66 67
+ 1 96 5K OHMS 110 110
−XM to 13−2
G 97
63 112 112
− 2 79 to 11−5
−XM −10A31

1
9

2
3
5
6
7
8

4
0−10 V SIEMENS

L3
SIGNAL 63 NOTE: SEE SHEET 12 FOR DRIVE PARAMETER SETTING PROCEDURE.
6SE6440−2AB17−5AA1

L/L1
N/L2
GENERATOR to 11−1 180−264VAC/3.9A

0V
1 HP

DIN1
DIN2
DIN3
DIN4

+10V
+15V

AIN1−
AIN1+
AOUT− 13
AOUT+ 12
AIN2/PID− 11
AIN2/PID+ 10

RL1
RL2
73

RS485
PE

D1GND1

U
V
W
14 MOTOR PTC
15 MOTOR PTC
16 DIN5
17 DIN6
18
19
20
21
22
23 PE
24 N−
25 P+
PU +5V
REMOTE START REMOTE STOP

40 39 39

WHT
WHT
GRN−YEL
BROWN
BLUE
BLACK
to 11−3 3 4 −XM from 1−7
28 20 PE U W V −10W21 −XM 39
98 to 11−5
MOTOR CABLE
MOTOR 1
RELEASE
−10K31 −10S42 99 MOTOR 1
40 14 13 3 4 RELEASE
+MTR1 from 1−8 −10S42 −XM −XM
2
−10S11 1 3 1 2 13 14
0.86 HP 10−4 10−4
MOTOR 1 MOTOR 1
THERMOSTAT PE PE RELEASE
NO 10−4,10−5 −10K31
+MTR1 NC 1 REMOVE JUMPER
−10M21 9 FOR REMOTE STOP
230VAC 5
MOTOR 1 2480 RPM −10V31 10−3
1N4001 MOTOR 1
RELEASE

Figure 12-28 Motor control 1

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


1 1
from 10−8
4 4
from 10−8

−1K81
63 −11K31
1−8
MOTOR DRIVE 11−3
1 ENABLE RELAY MOTOR 2

−11Q31
−11Q32
1 1 RELEASE
16A/440V 4
2 75 12 4
83 8 100 12

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


MOTOR 2 −11R31
AUTO/MANUAL 2 2 8
MOTOR 2 3
91 −11S41 77 78SPEED POT 114
from 10−2 91 114
94 5K OHMS to 13−4
112 112
95 to 13−1
63 63 112 112
from 10−2 101 from 10−5
−11A31

1
9

2
3
5
6
7
8

4
11
SIEMENS

L3
10
12
13
NOTE: SEE SHEET 12 FOR DRIVE PARAMETER SETTING PROCEDURE.

L/L1
6SE6440−2AB17−5AA1

N/L2
180−264VAC/3.9A

0V
1 HP

DIN1
DIN2
DIN3
DIN4

+10V
+15V

AIN1−

AIN1+
AOUT−

AOUT+

AIN2/PID−
AIN2/PID+

RL1
RL2
84

RS485
PE

MOTOR PTC
MOTOR PTC
DIN5
DIN6
PE
N−
P+
D2GND1

U
V
W
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
PU +5V
REMOTE START REMOTE STOP

39 39

WHT
WHT
GRN−YEL
BROWN
BLUE
BLACK
5 6 from 10−5
PE U W V −11W21 −XM −XM
28 20
102
MOTOR CABLE
MOTOR 2 103
RELEASE
−11K31 −11S42 MOTOR 2
40 13 3 4 RELEASE
from 10−3 14 −11S42 −XM −XM
+MTR2 2
−11S11 1 3 1 2 15 16
0.86 HP 11−4 11−4
MOTOR 1 MOTOR 2
THERMOSTAT PE PE RELEASE
NO 11−4,11−5 −11K31
+MTR2 NC 1 REMOVE JUMPER
−11M21 9 FOR REMOTE STOP
230VAC 5
MOTOR 2 2480 RPM −11V31 11−3
1N4001 MOTOR 2
RELEASE

Figure 12-29 Motor control 2

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-31
VL215 Melter Electrical Schematics (contd)

DRIVE DIP SWITCH SETTINGS DRIVE PARAMETER SETTINGS TABLE

DRIVE PARAMETERS SETTING PROCEDURE

Part 779639C
ON CONTROL
PR. SETTING DESCRIPTION
BOARD
1. SET DIP SWITCHES AS SHOWN.
P0003 2 EXTENDED USER ACCESS LEVEL
ON I/O 2. PERFORM QUICK COMMISIONING BY SETTING PARAMETERS P0003 THROUGH P3900 PER THE
P0010 1 START QUICK COMMISIONING SETTINGS SHOWN IN THE TABLE. INDEXED PARAMETERS WILL SHOW ”in000” IN THE KEYPAD DISPLAY.
BOARD
PRESS THE ”P” BUTTON TO SELECT THE PARAMETER AND ENTER ITS VALUE. USE THE ”Fn” KEY TO
P0100 0 CHECK/SET FREQUENCY SETTING (50/60 Hz) ADJUST EACH DIGIT INDIVIDUALLY IF NECESSARY.
12-32 Technical Data

P0300 1 MOTOR TYPE 3. ONCE THE VALUE FOR P3900 IS ENTERED, THE DRIVE WILL PERFORM SOME CALCULATIONS. THIS
MAY TAKE 1−2 MINUTES. THE DISPLAY WILL INDICATE THAT THE DRIVE IS BUSY.
P0304 230 MOTOR VOLTAGE (VAC)
4. TURN THE START/STOP SWITCH ON THE VL300 PANEL TO THE START POSITION. THE DRIVE WILL
P0305 3.60 MOTOR CURRENT (A)
SEND A PULSE CURRENT THROUGH THE MOTOR TO DETERMINE STATOR RESISTANCE AND OTHER
MOTOR POWER (kW) PARAMETERS. THIS MAY TAKE A FEW MINUTES. SOME HIGH PITCHED SOUNDS MAY BE HEARD WHILE
P0307 0.64 THE DRIVE IS PULSING THE MOTOR. THE DISPLAY WILL SHOW ”BUSY” AFTER A FEW SECONDS OF
MOTOR POWER FACTOR PULSING.
P0308 0.59
87 MOTOR FREQUENCY (Hz) 5. ONCE THE DRIVE IS FINISHED PERFORMING CALCULATIONS, FINISH ENTERING VALUES FOR P1310
P0310 AND P2000.
P0311 2480 MOTOR SPEED (RPM)
6. TURN THE MOTOR START SWITCH OFF.
P0335 0 MOTOR COOLING METHOD
7. GO TO PARAMETER r0000 AND PRESS ”P” TO EXIT THE PARAMETER SETTING MODE. THE PROCEDURE
P0640 150 MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR (%) IS NOW COMPLETE.
P0700 2 START/STOP COMMAND SOURCE

P1000 2 FREQUENCY SETPOINT SOURCE

P1080 0 MINIMUM FREQUENCY (Hz)

P1082 87 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY (Hz)

P1120 1 RAMP−UP TIME (sec)

P1121 1 RAMP−DOWN TIME (sec)

P1135 5 OFF 3 RAMP−DOWN TIME (sec)

P1300 0 CONTROL MODE

P1500 0 TORQUE SETPOINT

P1910 1 MOTOR DATA IDENTIFICATION

P3900 2 END QUICK COMMISIONING

P1310 5 CONTINUOUS BOOST (%)

P2000 87 REFERENCE FREQUENCY (Hz)

Figure 12-30 Drive parameter setting procedure (Brook Hansen motor)

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


DRIVE DIP SWITCH SETTINGS DRIVE PARAMETER SETTINGS TABLE

ON CONTROL DRIVE PARAMETERS SETTING PROCEDURE


PR. SETTING DESCRIPTION
BOARD
1. SET DIP SWITCHES AS SHOWN.
P0003 2 EXTENDED USER ACCESS LEVEL
ON I/O 2. PERFORM QUICK COMMISIONING BY SETTING PARAMETERS P0003 THROUGH P3900 PER THE
P0010 1 START QUICK COMMISIONING SETTINGS SHOWN IN THE TABLE. INDEXED PARAMETERS WILL SHOW ”in000” IN THE KEYPAD DISPLAY.
BOARD
PRESS THE ”P” BUTTON TO SELECT THE PARAMETER AND ENTER ITS VALUE. USE THE ”Fn” KEY TO
P0100 0 CHECK/SET FREQUENCY SETTING (50/60 Hz) ADJUST EACH DIGIT INDIVIDUALLY IF NECESSARY.

P0300 1 MOTOR TYPE 3. ONCE THE VALUE FOR P3900 IS ENTERED, THE DRIVE WILL PERFORM SOME CALCULATIONS. THIS

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


MAY TAKE 1−2 MINUTES. THE DISPLAY WILL INDICATE THAT THE DRIVE IS BUSY.
P0304 220 MOTOR VOLTAGE (VAC)
4. TURN THE START/STOP SWITCH ON THE VL300 PANEL TO THE START POSITION. THE DRIVE WILL
P0305 1.98 MOTOR CURRENT (A)
SEND A PULSE CURRENT THROUGH THE MOTOR TO DETERMINE STATOR RESISTANCE AND OTHER
MOTOR POWER (kW) PARAMETERS. THIS MAY TAKE A FEW MINUTES. SOME HIGH PITCHED SOUNDS MAY BE HEARD WHILE
P0307 0.37 THE DRIVE IS PULSING THE MOTOR. THE DISPLAY WILL SHOW ”BUSY” AFTER A FEW SECONDS OF
MOTOR POWER FACTOR PULSING.
P0308 0.74
50 MOTOR FREQUENCY (Hz) 5. ONCE THE DRIVE IS FINISHED PERFORMING CALCULATIONS, FINISH ENTERING VALUES FOR P1310
P0310 AND P2000.
P0311 1380 MOTOR SPEED (RPM)
6. TURN THE MOTOR START SWITCH OFF.
P0335 0 MOTOR COOLING METHOD
7. GO TO PARAMETER r0000 AND PRESS ”P” TO EXIT THE PARAMETER SETTING MODE. THE PROCEDURE
P0640 150 MOTOR OVERLOAD FACTOR (%) IS NOW COMPLETE.
P0700 2 START/STOP COMMAND SOURCE

P1000 2 FREQUENCY SETPOINT SOURCE

P1080 0 MINIMUM FREQUENCY (Hz)

P1082 50 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY (Hz)

P1120 1 RAMP−UP TIME (sec)

P1121 1 RAMP−DOWN TIME (sec)

P1135 5 OFF 3 RAMP−DOWN TIME (sec)

P1300 0 CONTROL MODE

P1500 0 TORQUE SETPOINT

P1910 1 MOTOR DATA IDENTIFICATION

P3900 2 END QUICK COMMISIONING

P0776 1 TYPE OF DAC

P1310 5 CONTINUOUS BOOST (%)

P2000 50 REFERENCE FREQUENCY (Hz)

Figure 12-31 Drive parameter setting procedure (SEW Eurodrive motor)

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-33
VL215 Melter Electrical Schematics (contd)

Part 779639C
from 3−4
from 3−4
12-34 Technical Data

1
4
RPM DISPLAY

10 9 8 7 6
−13P21

1 2 3 4 5

112 112
from 11−5

−13S31

1NC 2NC
113

1NO 2NO

110 110 114 114


from 10−5 1C 2C from 11−5

SELECTOR SWITCH

Figure 12-32 RPM readout

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


JUMPER JUMPER
1 2 3
−XL1 −XL1 −XL1

1 +HYD 1 +HYD 1 +HYD


−14E21 −14E22 −14E31

E 2005 Nordson Corporation


500W@240V 500W@240V 500W@240V
GRID GRID GRID
2 2 2
HEATER 1 HEATER 2 HEATER 3

JUMPER JUMPER
1 2 3
−XL2 −XL2 −XL2

1 1 JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER


from 1−5
1 2 3 4 5
−XL3 −XL3 −XL3 −XL3 −XL3

1 +HYD 1 +HYD 1 +HYD 1 +HYD 1 +HYD


−14E24 −14E23 −14E34 −14E33 −14E43

500W@240V 500W@240V 500W@240V 500W@240V 500W@240V


RESERVOIR RESERVOIR RESERVOIR RESERVOIR RESERVOIR
2 2 2 2 2
HEATER 1 HEATER 2 HEATER 3 HEATER 4 HEATER 5

2 2 JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER


from 1−5
1 2 3 4 5
−XL4 −XL4 −XL4 −XL4 −XL4

Figure 12-33 Grid and reservoir heaters

Part 779639C
Technical Data 12-35
12-36 Technical Data

Part 779639C E 2005 Nordson Corporation


DECLARATION of CONFORMITY
(For CE-Certified Adhesive/Sealant Application Equipment)

PRODUCT:
VL Adhesive Melters, Models VL210, VL215, VL410, VL415, VL430, VL450

APPLICABLE DIRECTIVES:
98/37/EC (Machinery Directive)
73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive)
89/336/EEC (Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive)

STANDARDS USED TO VERIFY COMPLIANCE:


EN 12100 EN 61000-6-2
EN 563 EN 61000-6-4
EN 60204-1

PRINCIPLES:
This product has been manufactured according to good engineering practice.

The product specified conforms to the directive and standards described above.

Date: 8 February 2007


John J. Keane, Senior Vice President

Nordson Corporation S Westlake, Ohio


DOC043

Вам также может понравиться